US20180168615A1 - Method of deforming staples from two different types of staple cartridges with the same surgical stapling instrument - Google Patents

Abstract

Methods for providing and using a surgical instrument system are disclosed.

Description

BACKGROUND
• The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various arrangements, to surgical stapling and cutting instruments and staple cartridges for use therewith that are designed to staple and cut tissue.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
• Various features of the embodiments described herein, together with advantages thereof, may be understood in accordance with the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings as follows:
• FIG. 1 is a side elevational view of a surgical system comprising a handle assembly and multiple interchangeable surgical tool assemblies that may be used therewith;
• FIG. 2 is a perspective view of one of the interchangeable surgical tool assemblies of FIG. 1 operably coupled to the handle assembly of FIG. 1;
• FIG. 3 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the handle assembly and interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIGS. 1 and 2;
• FIG. 4 is a perspective view of another one of the interchangeable surgical tool assemblies depicted in FIG. 1;
• FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 4;
• FIG. 6 is another partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIGS. 4 and 5;
• FIG. 7 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIGS. 4-6;
• FIG. 7A is an enlarged top view of a portion of an elastic spine assembly of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 7;
• FIG. 8 is another exploded assembly view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIGS. 4-7;
• FIG. 9 is another cross-sectional perspective view of a surgical end effector portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIGS. 4-8;
• FIG. 10 is an exploded assembly view of the surgical end effector portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly depicted in FIG. 9;
• FIG. 11 is a perspective view, a side elevational view and a front elevational view of a firing member embodiment that may be employed in the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 10;
• FIG. 12 is a perspective view of an anvil that may be employed in the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 4;
• FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of the anvil of FIG. 12;
• FIG. 14 is a bottom view of the anvil of FIGS. 12 and 13;
• FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of a portion of a surgical end effector and shaft portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 4 with an unspent or unfired surgical staple cartridge properly seated with an elongate channel of the surgical end effector;
• FIG. 16 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgical end effector and shaft portion of FIG. 15 after the surgical staple cartridge has been at least partially fired and a firing member thereof is being retracted to a starting position;
• FIG. 17 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgical end effector and shaft portion of FIG. 16 after the firing member has been fully retracted back to the starting position;
• FIG. 18 is a top cross-sectional view of the surgical end effector and shaft portion depicted in FIG. 15 with the unspent or unfired surgical staple cartridge properly seated with the elongate channel of the surgical end effector;
• FIG. 19 is another top cross-sectional view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 18 with a surgical staple cartridge mounted therein that has been at least partially fired and illustrates the firing member retained in a locked position;
• FIG. 20 is a partial cross-sectional view of portions of the anvil and elongate channel of the interchangeable tool assembly of FIG. 4;
• FIG. 21 is an exploded side elevational view of portions of the anvil and elongate channel of FIG. 20;
• FIG. 22 is a rear perspective view of an anvil mounting portion of an anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of an anvil mounting portion of another anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 24 is a rear perspective view of an anvil mounting portion of another anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 25 is a perspective view of an anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the anvil of FIG. 25;
• FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional end view of the anvil of FIG. 25;
• FIG. 28 is a perspective view of another anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the anvil embodiment of FIG. 28;
• FIG. 30 is a top view of a distal end portion of an anvil body portion of the anvil of FIG. 28;
• FIG. 31 is a top view of a distal end portion of an anvil body portion of another anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional end perspective view of the anvil of FIG. 31;
• FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional end perspective view of another anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 34 is a perspective view of a closure member embodiment comprising a distal closure tube segment;
• FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of the closure member embodiment of FIG. 34;
• FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of an interchangeable surgical tool assembly embodiment showing a position of an anvil mounting portion of an anvil in a fully closed position and a firing member thereof in a starting position;
• FIG. 37 is another partial cross-sectional view of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 36 at the commencement of an opening process;
• FIG. 38 is another partial cross-sectional view of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 37 with the anvil in the fully opened position;
• FIG. 39 is a side elevational view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 36;
• FIG. 40 is a side elevational view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 37;
• FIG. 41 is a side elevational view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 38;
• FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of another closure member embodiment;
• FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional end view of the closure member of FIG. 42;
• FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional end view of another closure member embodiment;
• FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional end view of another closure member embodiment;
• FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional end view of another closure member embodiment;
• FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of portions of a surgical end effector of an interchangeable tool assembly illustrated in FIG. 1;
• FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of portions of a surgical end effector of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 5;
• FIG. 49 is another cross-sectional view of the surgical end effector of FIG. 48;
• FIG. 50 is a partial perspective view of a portion of an underside of an anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 5 with an anvil of a surgical end effector thereof in a fully opened position;
• FIG. 52 is another partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 51 with the anvil of the surgical end effector thereof in a first closed position;
• FIG. 53 is another partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 51 at the commencement of the firing process wherein the anvil is in the first closed position and a firing member of the surgical end effector thereof has moved distally out of a starting position;
• FIG. 54 is another partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 51 wherein the anvil is in a second closed position and the firing member has been distally advanced into a surgical staple cartridge of the surgical end effector thereof;
• FIG. 55 is a graphical comparison of firing energy versus time for different interchangeable surgical tool assemblies;
• FIG. 56 is a graphical depiction of force to fire improvements and comparisons of firing loads verses the percentage of firing distance that the firing member thereof has traveled for four different interchangeable surgical tool assemblies;
• FIG. 57 provides a comparison between a first embodiment of an anvil and a second embodiment of an anvil;
• FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector comprising the second anvil embodiment of FIG. 57;
• FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first anvil embodiment of FIG. 57 and a firing member configured to engage the first anvil embodiment;
• FIG. 60 is a partial elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 59;
• FIG. 61 is an illustration depicting stress concentrations in the first anvil embodiment of FIG. 57 and the firing member of FIG. 59;
• FIG. 62 is an another illustration depicting stress concentrations in the firing member of FIG. 59;
• FIG. 63 is a perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 64 is a side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 63;
• FIG. 65 is a front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 63;
• FIG. 66 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 67 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 66;
• FIG. 68 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 66;
• FIG. 69 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 70 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 69;
• FIG. 71 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 69;
• FIG. 72 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 73 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 72;
• FIG. 74 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 72;
• FIG. 75 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 76 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 75;
• FIG. 77 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 75;
• FIG. 78 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 79 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 78;
• FIG. 80 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 78;
• FIG. 81 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 82 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 81;
• FIG. 83 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 81;
• FIG. 84 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 85 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 84;
• FIG. 86 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 84;
• FIG. 87 is a partial perspective view of a firing member in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 88 is a partial side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 87;
• FIG. 89 is another partial perspective view of the firing member of FIG. 87;
• FIG. 90 is a partial front elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 87;
• FIG. 91 is a schematic depicting the energy needed to advance firing members disclosed herein through staple firing strokes;
• FIG. 92 is a detail view of a lateral projection extending from the firing member of FIG. 66 schematically illustrating the interaction between the lateral projection and an anvil in a flexed condition;
• FIG. 93 is a detail view of a lateral projection extending from the firing member of FIG. 81 schematically illustrating the interaction between the lateral projection and an anvil in a flexed condition;
• FIG. 94 is a detail view of a lateral projection extending from the firing member of FIG. 81 schematically illustrating the interaction between the lateral projection and an anvil another flexed condition;
• FIG. 95 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument including a staple cartridge in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 96 is an exploded view of the end effector of FIG. 95;
• FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the staple cartridge FIG. 95;
• FIG. 98 is a partial perspective view of a channel of the end effector of FIG. 95 configured to receive the staple cartridge of FIG. 95;
• FIG. 98A is a partial perspective view of the channel of FIG. 98;
• FIG. 98B is a circuit diagram of a cartridge circuit of the staple cartridge of FIG. 97;
• FIG. 98C is a circuit diagram of a carrier circuit of the end effector of FIG. 95;
• FIG. 99 is a bottom partial view of the end effector of FIG. 95 illustrating an intact trace element and a sled in a starting position in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 100 is a bottom partial view of the end effector of FIG. 95 illustrating a broken trace element and a sled in a partially advanced position in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 100A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical circuit in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 100B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical circuit in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 100C is a block diagram illustrating an electrical circuit in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 100D is a block diagram illustrating an electrical circuit in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 101 is a circuit diagram of a safety mechanism of the end effector of FIG. 95 in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 102 is a switch of the circuit diagram of FIG. 101 in an open configuration in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 103 illustrates the switch of FIG. 102 in a closed configuration;
• FIG. 103A is a safety mechanism of the end effector of FIG. 95 in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 103B is a logic diagram of a method for controlling the firing of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 104 is a partial perspective view of a staple cartridge including a conductive gate in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 105 is a partial exploded view of the staple cartridge of FIG. 104;
• FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of FIG. 105 showing the conductive gate in a fully closed configuration;
• FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of FIG. 105 showing the conductive gate in an open configuration;
• FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of FIG. 105 showing the conductive gate transitioning from an open configuration to a partially closed configuration;
• FIG. 109 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical circuit configured to activate/deactivate a firing system of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 110 illustrates a controller a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 111 illustrates a combinational logic circuit of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 112 illustrates a sequential logic circuit of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 113 is an electromagnetic lockout mechanism for a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 114 illustrates the electromagnetic lockout mechanism of FIG. 113 in a locked configuration;
• FIG. 115 illustrates the electromagnetic lockout mechanism of FIG. 113 in an unlocked configuration;
• FIG. 116 is a circuit diagram of an electrical circuit in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram of an electrical circuit of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 117A is an electrical circuit configured to detect the position and progression of a staple firing member illustrating the staple firing member in a fully fired position;
• FIG. 117B illustrates the staple firing member of FIG. 117A in a fully retracted position;
• FIG. 118 is a perspective view of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument comprising a power assembly, a handle assembly, and an interchangeable shaft assembly;
• FIG. 119 is perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 118 with the interchangeable shaft assembly separated from the handle assembly;
• FIGS. 120A and 120B depict a circuit diagram of the surgical instrument of FIG. 118;
• FIG. 121 is a circuit diagram of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 122A is a circuit diagram of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 122B illustrates minimum and maximum thresholds of current drawn by a motor of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 123 is circuit diagram illustrating a beginning-of-stroke switch circuit and an end-of-stroke switch circuit with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 124 is logic diagram illustrating a failure response system in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 125 is logic diagram illustrating a failure response system in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 126 is logic diagram illustrating a failure response system in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 127 is logic diagram illustrating a failure response system in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a pair of angled sidewalls and a forming surface;
• FIG. 129 is a plan view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128;
• FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128 taken along line 130-130 in FIG. 129;
• FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128 taken along line 131-131 in FIG. 129;
• FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128 taken along line 132-132 in FIG. 129;
• FIG. 133 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128 taken along line 133-133 in FIG. 129;
• FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a forming surface having an entry zone and an exit zone comprising different radii of curvature;
• FIG. 135 is a plan view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134;
• FIG. 136 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134 taken along line 136-136 in FIG. 135;
• FIG. 137 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134 taken along line 137-137 in FIG. 135;
• FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134 taken along line 138-138 in FIG. 135;
• FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134 taken along line 139-139 in FIG. 135;
• FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket, a distal forming pocket, and a pair of primary sidewalls extending from a planar anvil surface to the pockets at a first angle, wherein each pocket comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls extending from the primary sidewalls to forming surfaces of the pockets at a second angle different than the first angle;
• FIG. 141 is a plan view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140;
• FIG. 142 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140 taken along line 142-142 in FIG. 141;
• FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140 taken along line 143-143 in FIG. 141;
• FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140 taken along line 144-144 in FIG. 141;
• FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140 taken along line 145-145 in FIG. 141;
• FIG. 146 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket, a distal forming pocket, and primary sidewalls, wherein each pocket comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls, and wherein each pocket sidewall comprises discrete sidewall portions;
• FIG. 147 is a plan view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146;
• FIG. 148 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146 taken along line 148-148 in FIG. 147;
• FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146 taken along line 149-149 in FIG. 147;
• FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146 taken along line 150-150 in FIG. 147;
• FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146 taken along line 151-151 in FIG. 147;
• FIG. 152 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket, a distal forming pocket, and primary sidewalls, wherein each pocket comprises a pair of contoured sidewalls;
• FIG. 153 is a plan view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152;
• FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 taken along line 154-154 in FIG. 153;
• FIG. 155 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 taken along line 155-155 in FIG. 153;
• FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 taken along line 156-156 in FIG. 153;
• FIG. 157 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 taken along line 157-157 in FIG. 153;
• FIG. 158 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a forming surface having a groove defined therein;
• FIG. 159 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 158 taken along line 159-159 in FIG. 158;
• FIG. 160 is an enlarged view of the proximal forming pocket of the staple forming pocket arrangement shown in FIG. 159;
• FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 158 taken along line 161-161 in FIG. 158;
• FIG. 162 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 158 taken along line 162-162 in FIG. 158;
• FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 158 taken along line 163-163 in FIG. 158;
• FIG. 164 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a forming surface having a zoned groove defined therein;
• FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 164 taken along line 165-165 in FIG. 164;
• FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 164 taken along line 166-166 in FIG. 164;
• FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 164 taken along line 167-167 in FIG. 164;
• FIG. 168 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 164 taken along line 168-168 in FIG. 164;
• FIG. 169 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a forming surface having a groove defined therein, and wherein the pockets are bilaterally asymmetric with respect to a bridge of the pocket pair;
• FIG. 170 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 169 taken along line 170-170 in FIG. 169;
• FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 169 taken along line 171-171 in FIG. 169;
• FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 169 taken along line 172-172 in FIG. 169;
• FIG. 173 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 169 taken along line 173-173 in FIG. 169;
• FIG. 174 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a forming surface having an entry zone and an exit zone comprising different radii of curvature, and wherein each forming surface comprises a groove defined therein;
• FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 174 taken along line 175-175 in FIG. 174;
• FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 174 taken along line 176-176 in FIG. 174;
• FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 174 taken along line 177-177 in FIG. 174;
• FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 174 taken along line 178-178 in FIG. 174;
• FIG. 179 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket, wherein each pocket comprises a pair of contoured sidewalls and a forming surface groove defined therein, and wherein the pockets are bilaterally asymmetric with respect to a bridge of the pocket pair;
• FIG. 180 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 taken along line 180-180 in FIG. 179;
• FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 taken along line 181-181 in FIG. 179;
• FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 taken along line 182-182 in FIG. 179;
• FIG. 183 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 taken along line 183-183 in FIG. 179;
• FIG. 184 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket each comprising a forming surface groove defined therein, wherein the pockets are bilaterally symmetric with respect to a bridge of the pocket pair and rotationally asymmetric with respect to a center portion of the bridge;
• FIG. 185 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 184 taken along line 185-185 in FIG. 184;
• FIG. 186 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 184 taken along line 186-186 in FIG. 184;
• FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 184 taken along line 187-187 in FIG. 184;
• FIG. 188 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 184 taken along line 188-188 in FIG. 184;
• FIG. 189 is a plan view of a staple forming pocket arrangement comprising a proximal forming pocket and a distal forming pocket which is different than the proximal forming pocket, wherein the pockets are bilaterally asymmetric with respect to a bridge of the pocket pair, bilaterally symmetric with respect to a pocket axis of the pocket pair, and rotationally asymmetric with respect to a center portion of the bridge;
• FIG. 190 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 190-190 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 191 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 191-191 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 192-192 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 193 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 193-193 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 194-194 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 195-195 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 196 is a cross-sectional view of the staple forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 189 taken along line 196-196 in FIG. 189;
• FIG. 197 is partial cross-sectional view of a stapling assembly in a fully clamped but nonparallel configuration;
• FIG. 198 is an elevational view of a staple formed with the stapling assembly of FIG. 197;
• FIG. 199 is partial cross-sectional view of another stapling assembly in a fully clamped but nonparallel configuration;
• FIG. 200 is an elevational view of a staple formed with the stapling assembly of FIG. 199;
• FIG. 201 is a bottom view of an anvil comprising a plurality of forming pockets that are identical;
• FIG. 202 is a bottom view of an anvil comprising laterally changing forming pocket pairs;
• FIG. 203 is a bottom view of an anvil comprising longitudinally changing forming pocket pairs;
• FIG. 204 is a bottom view of an anvil comprising laterally and longitudinally changing forming pocket pairs;
• FIG. 205 is a table identifying specific features of various forming pocket arrangements;
• FIG. 206 contains cross-sectional views of different forming pocket arrangements corresponding to various features listed in the table of FIG. 205;
• FIG. 207 is a comparison of forming pocket arrangements, staples formed with those forming pocket arrangements, and the maximum forces required to fire those staples against those forming pocket arrangements;
• FIG. 208 is a table identifying additional features of the forming pocket arrangements shown in the table of FIG. 205;
• FIG. 209 depicts a staple in a fully formed configuration and in an overdriven configuration formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 210 depicts a staple in a fully formed configuration and in an overdriven configuration formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 211 depicts a staple in a first and second stage of a forming process formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 212 depicts the staple of FIG. 211 in a third and fourth stage of the forming process formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 211;
• FIG. 213 depicts a staple in a first and second stage of a forming process formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 214 depicts the staple of FIG. 213 in a third and fourth stage of the forming process formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 213;
• FIG. 215 depicts a staple in various stages of forming formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 216 depicts a staple in various stages of forming formed with a forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment;
• FIG. 217 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 134 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in a misaligned state;
• FIG. 218 is a comparison of forming pocket arrangements and staples formed with the forming pocket arrangements;
• FIG. 219 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 146 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in a misaligned state;
• FIG. 220 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 140 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in a misaligned state;
• FIG. 221 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an aligned state;
• FIG. 222 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 152 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an misaligned state;
• FIG. 223 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an aligned state;
• FIG. 224 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 179 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an misaligned state;
• FIG. 225 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 128 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an misaligned state; and
• FIG. 226 depicts a staple formed with the forming pocket arrangement of FIG. 158 in a fully formed configuration, wherein the staple contacted the forming pockets in an misaligned state.
• Corresponding reference characters indicate corresponding parts throughout the several views. The exemplifications set out herein illustrate various embodiments of the invention, in one form, and such exemplifications are not to be construed as limiting the scope of the invention in any manner.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,185, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND REPLACEABLE TOOL ASSEMBLIES THEREOF;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,230, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,221, entitled LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL END EFFECTORS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,209, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS AND FIRING MEMBERS THEREOF;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,198, entitled LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL END EFFECTORS AND REPLACEABLE TOOL ASSEMBLIES; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,240, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS AND ADAPTABLE FIRING MEMBERS THEREFOR.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,939, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES THEREIN;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,941, entitled SURGICAL TOOL ASSEMBLIES WITH CLUTCHING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SHIFTING BETWEEN CLOSURE SYSTEMS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION FEATURES AND ARTICULATION AND FIRING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,943, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,950, entitled SURGICAL TOOL ASSEMBLIES WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,945, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES THEREIN;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,946, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,951, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH JAW OPENING FEATURES FOR INCREASING A JAW OPENING DISTANCE;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,953, entitled METHODS OF STAPLING TISSUE;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,954, entitled FIRING MEMBERS WITH NON-PARALLEL JAW ENGAGEMENT FEATURES FOR SURGICAL END EFFECTORS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,955, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS WITH EXPANDABLE TISSUE STOP ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,948, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,956, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH POSITIVE JAW OPENING FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,958, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTING FIRING SYSTEM ACTUATION UNLESS AN UNSPENT STAPLE CARTRIDGE IS PRESENT; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,947, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES THEREIN.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,896, entitled METHOD FOR RESETTING A FUSE OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SHAFT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,898, entitled STAPLE FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENT TO ACCOMMODATE DIFFERENT TYPES OF STAPLES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,899, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING IMPROVED JAW CONTROL;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,901, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE AND STAPLE CARTRIDGE CHANNEL COMPRISING WINDOWS DEFINED THEREIN;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,902, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CUTTING MEMBER;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,904, entitled STAPLE FIRING MEMBER COMPRISING A MISSING CARTRIDGE AND/OR SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,905, entitled FIRING ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,907, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM COMPRISING AN END EFFECTOR LOCKOUT AND A FIRING ASSEMBLY LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,908, entitled FIRING ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A FUSE; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,909, entitled FIRING ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A MULTIPLE FAILED-STATE FUSE.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,920, entitled STAPLE FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,913, entitled ANVIL ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,893, entitled BILATERALLY ASYMMETRIC STAPLE FORMING POCKET PAIRS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,929, entitled CLOSURE MEMBERS WITH CAM SURFACE ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH SEPARATE AND DISTINCT CLOSURE AND FIRING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,911, entitled SURGICAL STAPLERS WITH INDEPENDENTLY ACTUATABLE CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,927, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH SMART STAPLE CARTRIDGES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,917, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING STAPLES WITH DIFFERENT CLAMPING BREADTHS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,900, entitled STAPLE FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS COMPRISING PRIMARY SIDEWALLS AND POCKET SIDEWALLS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,931, entitled NO-CARTRIDGE AND SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,915, entitled FIRING MEMBER PIN ANGLE;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,897, entitled STAPLE FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS COMPRISING ZONED FORMING SURFACE GROOVES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,922, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FAILURE RESPONSE MODES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,924, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH PRIMARY AND SAFETY PROCESSORS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,912, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH JAWS THAT ARE PIVOTABLE ABOUT A FIXED AXIS AND INCLUDE SEPARATE AND DISTINCT CLOSURE AND FIRING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,910, entitled ANVIL HAVING A KNIFE SLOT WIDTH;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,903, entitled CLOSURE MEMBER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,906, entitled FIRING MEMBER PIN CONFIGURATIONS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,188, entitled STEPPED STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH ASYMMETRICAL STAPLES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,192, entitled STEPPED STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH TISSUE RETENTION AND GAP SETTING FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,206, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH DEFORMABLE DRIVER RETENTION FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,226, entitled DURABILITY FEATURES FOR END EFFECTORS AND FIRING ASSEMBLIES OF SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,222, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS HAVING END EFFECTORS WITH POSITIVE OPENING FEATURES; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,236, entitled CONNECTION PORTIONS FOR DISPOSABLE LOADING UNITS FOR SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,887, entitled METHOD FOR ATTACHING A SHAFT ASSEMBLY TO A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT AND, ALTERNATIVELY, TO A SURGICAL ROBOT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,889, entitled SHAFT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A MANUALLY-OPERABLE RETRACTION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH A MOTORIZED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,890, entitled SHAFT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING SEPARATELY ACTUATABLE AND RETRACTABLE SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,891, entitled SHAFT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A CLUTCH CONFIGURED TO ADAPT THE OUTPUT OF A ROTARY FIRING MEMBER TO TWO DIFFERENT SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,892, entitled SURGICAL SYSTEM COMPRISING A FIRING MEMBER ROTATABLE INTO AN ARTICULATION STATE TO ARTICULATE AN END EFFECTOR OF THE SURGICAL SYSTEM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,894, entitled SHAFT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKOUT; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,895, entitled SHAFT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING FIRST AND SECOND ARTICULATION LOCKOUTS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,916, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,918, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,919, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,921, entitled SURGICAL STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH MOVABLE CAMMING MEMBER CONFIGURED TO DISENGAGE FIRING MEMBER LOCKOUT FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,923, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,925, entitled JAW ACTUATED LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTING ADVANCEMENT OF A FIRING MEMBER IN A SURGICAL END EFFECTOR UNLESS AN UNFIRED CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED IN THE END EFFECTOR;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,926, entitled AXIALLY MOVABLE CLOSURE SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR APPLYING CLOSURE MOTIONS TO JAWS OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,928, entitled PROTECTIVE COVER ARRANGEMENTS FOR A JOINT INTERFACE BETWEEN A MOVABLE JAW AND ACTUATOR SHAFT OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,930, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTOR WITH TWO SEPARATE COOPERATING OPENING FEATURES FOR OPENING AND CLOSING END EFFECTOR JAWS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,932, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL END EFFECTOR WITH ASYMMETRIC SHAFT ARRANGEMENT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,933, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH INDEPENDENT PIVOTABLE LINKAGE DISTAL OF AN ARTICULATION LOCK;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,934, entitled ARTICULATION LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR LOCKING AN END EFFECTOR IN AN ARTICULATED POSITION IN RESPONSE TO ACTUATION OF A JAW CLOSURE SYSTEM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,935, entitled LATERALLY ACTUATABLE ARTICULATION LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR LOCKING AN END EFFECTOR OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT IN AN ARTICULATED CONFIGURATION; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,936, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATION STROKE AMPLIFICATION FEATURES.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Jun. 24, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,775, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING WIRE STAPLES AND STAMPED STAPLES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,807, entitled STAPLING SYSTEM FOR USE WITH WIRE STAPLES AND STAMPED STAPLES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,834, entitled STAMPED STAPLES AND STAPLE CARTRIDGES USING THE SAME;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,788, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING OVERDRIVEN STAPLES; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,818, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING OFFSET LONGITUDINAL STAPLE ROWS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. patent applications that were filed on Jun. 24, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
• • U.S. Design patent application Serial No. 29/569,218, entitled SURGICAL FASTENER;
  • U.S. Design patent application Serial No. 29/569,227, entitled SURGICAL FASTENER;
  • U.S. Design patent application Serial No. 29/569,259, entitled SURGICAL FASTENER CARTRIDGE; and
  • U.S. Design patent application Serial No. 29/569,264, entitled SURGICAL FASTENER CARTRIDGE.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Apr. 1, 2016 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,325, entitled METHOD FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,321, entitled MODULAR SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A DISPLAY;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,326, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A DISPLAY INCLUDING A RE-ORIENTABLE DISPLAY FIELD;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,263, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE ASSEMBLY WITH RECONFIGURABLE GRIP PORTION;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,262, entitled ROTARY POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MANUALLY ACTUATABLE BAILOUT SYSTEM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,277, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING END EFFECTOR WITH ANVIL CONCENTRIC DRIVE MEMBER;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,296, entitled INTERCHANGEABLE SURGICAL TOOL ASSEMBLY WITH A SURGICAL END EFFECTOR THAT IS SELECTIVELY ROTATABLE ABOUT A SHAFT AXIS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,258, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A SHIFTABLE TRANSMISSION;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,278, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE SELECTIVE CUTTING OF TISSUE;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,284, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A CONTOURABLE SHAFT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,295, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A TISSUE COMPRESSION LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,300, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING AN UNCLAMPING LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,196, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A JAW CLOSURE LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,203, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A JAW ATTACHMENT LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,210, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,324, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SHIFTING MECHANISM;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,335, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT COMPRISING MULTIPLE LOCKOUTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,339, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,253, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM CONFIGURED TO APPLY ANNULAR ROWS OF STAPLES HAVING DIFFERENT HEIGHTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,304, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A GROOVED FORMING POCKET;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,331, entitled ANVIL MODIFICATION MEMBERS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,336, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGES WITH ATRAUMATIC FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,312, entitled CIRCULAR STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING AN INCISABLE TISSUE SUPPORT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,309, entitled CIRCULAR STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING ROTARY FIRING SYSTEM; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,349, entitled CIRCULAR STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING LOAD CONTROL.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. patent applications identified below which were filed on Dec. 31, 2015 which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,488, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR BATTERY PACK FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,525, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,552, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH SEPARABLE MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. patent applications identified below which were filed on Feb. 9, 2016 which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,220, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH ARTICULATING AND AXIALLY TRANSLATABLE END EFFECTOR;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,228, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE LINK ARTICULATION ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,196, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ARTICULATION MECHANISM WITH SLOTTED SECONDARY CONSTRAINT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,206, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH AN END EFFECTOR THAT IS HIGHLY ARTICULATABLE RELATIVE TO AN ELONGATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,215, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH NON-SYMMETRICAL ARTICULATION ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,227, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH SINGLE ARTICULATION LINK ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,235, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH TENSIONING ARRANGEMENTS FOR CABLE DRIVEN ARTICULATION SYSTEMS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,230, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH OFF-AXIS FIRING BEAM ARRANGEMENTS; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION ARRANGEMENTS.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. patent applications identified below which were filed on Feb. 12, 2016 which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,254, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,259, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,275, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,289, entitled MECHANISMS FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Jun. 18, 2015 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,925, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS WITH POSITIVE JAW OPENING ARRANGEMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,941, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS WITH DUAL CAM ACTUATED JAW CLOSING FEATURES;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,914, entitled MOVABLE FIRING BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,900, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH COMPOSITE FIRING BEAM STRUCTURES WITH CENTER FIRING SUPPORT MEMBER FOR ARTICULATION SUPPORT;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,885, entitled DUAL ARTICULATION DRIVE SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,876, entitled PUSH/PULL ARTICULATION DRIVE SYSTEMS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 6, 2015 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,746, entitled POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256184;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,795, entitled MULTIPLE LEVEL THRESHOLDS TO MODIFY OPERATION OF POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/02561185;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,832, entitled ADAPTIVE TISSUE COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES TO ADJUST CLOSURE RATES FOR MULTIPLE TISSUE TYPES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256154;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,935, entitled OVERLAID MULTI SENSOR RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) ELECTRODE SYSTEM TO MEASURE TISSUE COMPRESSION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256071;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,831, entitled MONITORING SPEED CONTROL AND PRECISION INCREMENTING OF MOTOR FOR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256153;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,859, entitled TIME DEPENDENT EVALUATION OF SENSOR DATA TO DETERMINE STABILITY, CREEP, AND VISCOELASTIC ELEMENTS OF MEASURES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256187;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,817, entitled INTERACTIVE FEEDBACK SYSTEM FOR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256186;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,844, entitled CONTROL TECHNIQUES AND SUB-PROCESSOR CONTAINED WITHIN MODULAR SHAFT WITH SELECT CONTROL PROCESSING FROM HANDLE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256155;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,837, entitled SMART SENSORS WITH LOCAL SIGNAL PROCESSING, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256163;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,765, entitled SYSTEM FOR DETECTING THE MIS-INSERTION OF A STAPLE CARTRIDGE INTO A SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256160;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,799, entitled SIGNAL AND POWER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM POSITIONED ON A ROTATABLE SHAFT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256162; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,780, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A LOCKABLE BATTERY HOUSING, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0256161.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Feb. 27, 2015, and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,576, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM COMPRISING AN INSPECTION STATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249919;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,546, entitled SURGICAL APPARATUS CONFIGURED TO ASSESS WHETHER A PERFORMANCE PARAMETER OF THE SURGICAL APPARATUS IS WITHIN AN ACCEPTABLE PERFORMANCE BAND, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249915;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,560, entitled SURGICAL CHARGING SYSTEM THAT CHARGES AND/OR CONDITIONS ONE OR MORE BATTERIES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249910;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,566, entitled CHARGING SYSTEM THAT ENABLES EMERGENCY RESOLUTIONS FOR CHARGING A BATTERY, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249918;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,555, entitled SYSTEM FOR MONITORING WHETHER A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT NEEDS TO BE SERVICED, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249916;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,542, entitled REINFORCED BATTERY FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249908;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,548, entitled POWER ADAPTER FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249909;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,526, entitled ADAPTABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249945;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,541, entitled MODULAR STAPLING ASSEMBLY, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249927; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,562, entitled SURGICAL APPARATUS CONFIGURED TO TRACK AN END-OF-LIFE PARAMETER, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0249917.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Dec. 18, 2014 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,478, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR AND MEANS FOR ADJUSTING THE FIRING STROKE OF A FIRING MEMBER, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174977;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,483, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING LOCKABLE SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174969;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,139, entitled DRIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174978;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,148, entitled LOCKING ARRANGEMENTS FOR DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES WITH ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL END EFFECTORS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174976;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,130, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH AN ANVIL THAT IS SELECTIVELY MOVABLE ABOUT A DISCRETE NON-MOVABLE AXIS RELATIVE TO A STAPLE CARTRIDGE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174972;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,143, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH IMPROVED CLOSURE ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174983;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,117, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTORS AND MOVABLE FIRING BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174975;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,154, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTORS AND IMPROVED FIRING BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174973;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,493, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A FLEXIBLE ARTICULATION SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174970; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,500, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKABLE ARTICULATION SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0174971.
• Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 1, 2013 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,295, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CONDUCTIVE PATHWAYS FOR SIGNAL COMMUNICATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0246471;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,323, entitled ROTARY POWERED ARTICULATION JOINTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0246472;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,338, entitled THUMBWHEEL SWITCH ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0249557;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,499, entitled ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL DEVICE WITH SIGNAL RELAY ARRANGEMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,358,003;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,460, entitled MULTIPLE PROCESSOR MOTOR CONTROL FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0246478;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,358, entitled JOYSTICK SWITCH ASSEMBLIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,326,767;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,481, entitled SENSOR STRAIGHTENED END EFFECTOR DURING REMOVAL THROUGH TROCAR, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,468,438;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,518, entitled CONTROL METHODS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH REMOVABLE IMPLEMENT PORTIONS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0246475;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,375, entitled ROTARY POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,398,911; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,536, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SOFT STOP, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,307,986.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 14, 2013 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,097, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263542;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,193, entitled CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR A DRIVE MEMBER OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,332,987;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,053, entitled INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES FOR USE WITH A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263564;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,210, entitled SENSOR ARRANGEMENTS FOR ABSOLUTE POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263538;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,148, entitled MULTI-FUNCTION MOTOR FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263554;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,066, entitled DRIVE SYSTEM LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263565;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,117, entitled ARTICULATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,726;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,130, entitled DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,727; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,159, entitled METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0277017.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent application that was filed on Mar. 7, 2014 and is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/200,111, entitled CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263539.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 26, 2014 and are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,106, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272582;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,099, entitled STERILIZATION VERIFICATION CIRCUIT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272581;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,094, entitled VERIFICATION OF NUMBER OF BATTERY EXCHANGES/PROCEDURE COUNT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272580;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,117, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SLEEP OPTIONS OF SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND WAKE UP CONTROL, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272574;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,075, entitled MODULAR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272579;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,093, entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272569;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,116, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT UTILIZING SENSOR ADAPTATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272571;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,071, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT HAVING A SAFETY PROCESSOR, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272578;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,097, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272570;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,126, entitled INTERFACE SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272572;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,133, entitled MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272557;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,081, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A SEGMENTED CIRCUIT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0277471;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,076, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND VARIABLE VOLTAGE PROTECTION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0280424;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,111, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272583; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,125, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A ROTATABLE SHAFT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0280384.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Sep. 5, 2014 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,103, entitled CIRCUITRY AND SENSORS FOR POWERED MEDICAL DEVICE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066912;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,119, entitled ADJUNCT WITH INTEGRATED SENSORS TO QUANTIFY TISSUE COMPRESSION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066914;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/478,908, entitled MONITORING DEVICE DEGRADATION BASED ON COMPONENT EVALUATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066910;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/478,895, entitled MULTIPLE SENSORS WITH ONE SENSOR AFFECTING A SECOND SENSOR'S OUTPUT OR INTERPRETATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066909;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,110, entitled POLARITY OF HALL MAGNET TO DETECT MISLOADED CARTRIDGE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066915;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,098, entitled SMART CARTRIDGE WAKE UP OPERATION AND DATA RETENTION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066911;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,115, entitled MULTIPLE MOTOR CONTROL FOR POWERED MEDICAL DEVICE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066916; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,108, entitled LOCAL DISPLAY OF TISSUE PARAMETER STABILIZATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0066913.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Apr. 9, 2014 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,590, entitled MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKABLE DUAL DRIVE SHAFTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305987;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,581, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CLOSING DRIVE AND A FIRING DRIVE OPERATED FROM THE SAME ROTATABLE OUTPUT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305989;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,595, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SHAFT INCLUDING SWITCHES FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF THE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305988;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,588, entitled POWERED LINEAR SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0309666;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,591, entitled TRANSMISSION ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305991;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,584, entitled MODULAR MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ALIGNMENT FEATURES FOR ALIGNING ROTARY DRIVE SHAFTS WITH SURGICAL END EFFECTOR SHAFTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305994;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,587, entitled POWERED SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0309665;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,586, entitled DRIVE SYSTEM DECOUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305990; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,607, entitled MODULAR MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH STATUS INDICATION ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0305992.
• Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Apr. 16, 2013 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:
• • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,365, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED BY A SINGLE MOTOR;
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,376, entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH POWER;
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,382, entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH MOTOR AND PISTOL GRIP;
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,385, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE WITH MULTIPLE ACTUATION MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL; and
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,372, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED BY A SINGLE MOTOR.
• Numerous specific details are set forth to provide a thorough understanding of the overall structure, function, manufacture, and use of the embodiments as described in the specification and illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Well-known operations, components, and elements have not been described in detail so as not to obscure the embodiments described in the specification. The reader will understand that the embodiments described and illustrated herein are non-limiting examples, and thus it can be appreciated that the specific structural and functional details disclosed herein may be representative and illustrative. Variations and changes thereto may be made without departing from the scope of the claims.
• The terms “comprise” (and any form of comprise, such as “comprises” and “comprising”), “have” (and any form of have, such as “has” and “having”), “include” (and any form of include, such as “includes” and “including”) and “contain” (and any form of contain, such as “contains” and “containing”) are open-ended linking verbs. As a result, a surgical system, device, or apparatus that “comprises,” “has,” “includes” or “contains” one or more elements possesses those one or more elements, but is not limited to possessing only those one or more elements. Likewise, an element of a system, device, or apparatus that “comprises,” “has,” “includes” or “contains” one or more features possesses those one or more features, but is not limited to possessing only those one or more features.
• The terms “proximal” and “distal” are used herein with reference to a clinician manipulating the handle portion of the surgical instrument. The term “proximal” refers to the portion closest to the clinician and the term “distal” refers to the portion located away from the clinician. It will be further appreciated that, for convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “up”, and “down” may be used herein with respect to the drawings. However, surgical instruments are used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and/or absolute.
• Various exemplary devices and methods are provided for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, the reader will readily appreciate that the various methods and devices disclosed herein can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications including, for example, in connection with open surgical procedures. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, the reader will further appreciate that the various instruments disclosed herein can be inserted into a body in any way, such as through a natural orifice, through an incision or puncture hole formed in tissue, etc. The working portions or end effector portions of the instruments can be inserted directly into a patient's body or can be inserted through an access device that has a working channel through which the end effector and elongate shaft of a surgical instrument can be advanced.
• A surgical stapling system can comprise a shaft and an end effector extending from the shaft. The end effector comprises a first jaw and a second jaw. The first jaw comprises a staple cartridge. The staple cartridge is insertable into and removable from the first jaw; however, other embodiments are envisioned in which a staple cartridge is not removable from, or at least readily replaceable from, the first jaw. The second jaw comprises an anvil configured to deform staples ejected from the staple cartridge. The second jaw is pivotable relative to the first jaw about a closure axis; however, other embodiments are envisioned in which the first jaw is pivotable relative to the second jaw. The surgical stapling system further comprises an articulation joint configured to permit the end effector to be rotated, or articulated, relative to the shaft. The end effector is rotatable about an articulation axis extending through the articulation joint. Other embodiments are envisioned which do not include an articulation joint.
• The staple cartridge comprises a cartridge body. The cartridge body includes a proximal end, a distal end, and a deck extending between the proximal end and the distal end. In use, the staple cartridge is positioned on a first side of the tissue to be stapled and the anvil is positioned on a second side of the tissue. The anvil is moved toward the staple cartridge to compress and clamp the tissue against the deck. Thereafter, staples removably stored in the cartridge body can be deployed into the tissue. The cartridge body includes staple cavities defined therein wherein staples are removably stored in the staple cavities. The staple cavities are arranged in six longitudinal rows. Three rows of staple cavities are positioned on a first side of a longitudinal slot and three rows of staple cavities are positioned on a second side of the longitudinal slot. Other arrangements of staple cavities and staples may be possible.
• The staples are supported by staple drivers in the cartridge body. The drivers are movable between a first, or unfired position, and a second, or fired, position to eject the staples from the staple cavities. The drivers are retained in the cartridge body by a retainer which extends around the bottom of the cartridge body and includes resilient members configured to grip the cartridge body and hold the retainer to the cartridge body. The drivers are movable between their unfired positions and their fired positions by a sled. The sled is movable between a proximal position adjacent the proximal end and a distal position adjacent the distal end. The sled comprises a plurality of ramped surfaces configured to slide under the drivers and lift the drivers, and the staples supported thereon, toward the anvil.
• Further to the above, the sled is moved distally by a firing member. The firing member is configured to contact the sled and push the sled toward the distal end. The longitudinal slot defined in the cartridge body is configured to receive the firing member. The anvil also includes a slot configured to receive the firing member. The firing member further comprises a first cam which engages the first jaw and a second cam which engages the second jaw. As the firing member is advanced distally, the first cam and the second cam can control the distance, or tissue gap, between the deck of the staple cartridge and the anvil. The firing member also comprises a knife configured to incise the tissue captured intermediate the staple cartridge and the anvil. It is desirable for the knife to be positioned at least partially proximal to the ramped surfaces such that the staples are ejected ahead of the knife.
• FIG. 1 depicts a motor-driven surgical system 10 that may be used to perform a variety of different surgical procedures. As can be seen in that Figure, one example of the surgical system 10 includes four interchangeable surgical tool assemblies 100, 200, 300 and 1000 that are each adapted for interchangeable use with a handle assembly 500. Each interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100, 200, 300 and 1000 may be designed for use in connection with the performance of one or more specific surgical procedures. In another surgical system embodiment, the interchangeable surgical tool assemblies may be effectively employed with a tool drive assembly of a robotically controlled or automated surgical system. For example, the surgical tool assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods such as, but not limited to, those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
• FIG. 2 illustrates one form of an interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 that is operably coupled to the handle assembly 500. FIG. 3 illustrates attachment of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 to the handle assembly 500. The attachment arrangement and process depicted in FIG. 3 may also be employed in connection with attachment of any of the interchangeable surgical tool assemblies 100, 200, 300 and 1000 to a tool drive portion or tool drive housing of a robotic system. The handle assembly 500 may comprise a handle housing 502 that includes a pistol grip portion 504 that can be gripped and manipulated by the clinician. As will be briefly discussed below, the handle assembly 500 operably supports a plurality of drive systems that are configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100, 200, 300 and/or 1000 that is operably attached thereto.
• Referring now to FIG. 3, the handle assembly 500 may further include a frame 506 that operably supports the plurality of drive systems. For example, the frame 506 can operably support a “first” or closure drive system, generally designated as 510, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100, 200, 300 and 1000 that is operably attached or coupled to the handle assembly 500. In at least one form, the closure drive system 510 may include an actuator in the form of a closure trigger 512 that is pivotally supported by the frame 506. Such arrangement enables the closure trigger 512 to be manipulated by a clinician such that when the clinician grips the pistol grip portion 504 of the handle assembly 500, the closure trigger 512 may be easily pivoted from a starting or “unactuated” position to an “actuated” position and more particularly to a fully compressed or fully actuated position. In various forms, the closure drive system 510 further includes a closure linkage assembly 514 that is pivotally coupled to the closure trigger 512 or otherwise operably interfaces therewith. As will be discussed in further detail below, in the illustrated example, the closure linkage assembly 514 includes a transverse attachment pin 516 that facilitates attachment to a corresponding drive system on the surgical tool assembly. In use, to actuate the closure drive system, the clinician depresses the closure trigger 512 towards the pistol grip portion 504. As described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,142, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SENSOR SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein, when the clinician fully depresses the closure trigger 512 to attain the full closure stroke, the closure drive system is configured to lock the closure trigger 512 into the fully depressed or fully actuated position. When the clinician desires to unlock the closure trigger 512 to permit it to be biased to the unactuated position, the clinician simply activates a closure release button assembly 518 which enables the closure trigger to return to unactuated position. The closure release button 518 may also be configured to interact with various sensors that communicate with a microcontroller 520 in the handle assembly 500 for tracking the position of the closure trigger 512. Further details concerning the configuration and operation of the closure release button assembly 518 may be found in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575.
• In at least one form, the handle assembly 500 and the frame 506 may operably support another drive system referred to herein as a firing drive system 530 that is configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly that is attached thereto. As was described in detail in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575, the firing drive system 530 may employ an electric motor (not shown in FIGS. 1-3) that is located in the pistol grip portion 504 of the handle assembly 500. In various forms, the motor may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, the motor may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor. The motor may be powered by a power source 522 that in one form may comprise a removable power pack. The power pack may support a plurality of Lithium Ion (“LI”) or other suitable batteries therein. A number of batteries may be connected in series may be used as the power source 522 for the surgical system 10. In addition, the power source 522 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable.
• The electric motor is configured to axially drive a longitudinally movable drive member 540 in a distal and proximal directions depending upon the polarity of the motor. For example, when the motor is driven in one rotary direction, the longitudinally movable drive member 540 the will be axially driven in the distal direction “DD”. When the motor is driven in the opposite rotary direction, the longitudinally movable drive member 540 will be axially driven in a proximal direction “PD”. The handle assembly 500 can include a switch 513 which can be configured to reverse the polarity applied to the electric motor by the power source 522 or otherwise control the motor. The handle assembly 500 can also include a sensor or sensors (not shown) that is configured to detect the position of the drive member 540 and/or the direction in which the drive member 540 is being moved. Actuation of the motor can be controlled by a firing trigger 532 (FIG. 1) that is pivotally supported on the handle assembly 500. The firing trigger 532 may be pivoted between an unactuated position and an actuated position. The firing trigger 532 may be biased into the unactuated position by a spring or other biasing arrangement such that when the clinician releases the firing trigger 532, it may be pivoted or otherwise returned to the unactuated position by the spring or biasing arrangement. In at least one form, the firing trigger 532 can be positioned “outboard” of the closure trigger 512 as was discussed above. As discussed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575, the handle assembly 500 may be equipped with a firing trigger safety button (not shown) to prevent inadvertent actuation of the firing trigger 532. When the closure trigger 512 is in the unactuated position, the safety button is contained in the handle assembly 500 where the clinician cannot readily access it and move it between a safety position preventing actuation of the firing trigger 532 and a firing position wherein the firing trigger 532 may be fired. As the clinician depresses the closure trigger 512, the safety button and the firing trigger 532 pivot down wherein they can then be manipulated by the clinician.
• In at least one form, the longitudinally movable drive member 540 may have a rack of teeth (not shown) formed thereon for meshing engagement with a corresponding drive gear arrangement (not shown) that interfaces with the motor. Further details regarding those features may be found in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575. At least one form also includes a manually-actuatable “bailout” assembly that is configured to enable the clinician to manually retract the longitudinally movable drive member 540 should the motor become disabled. The bailout assembly may include a lever or bailout handle assembly that is stored within the handle assembly 500 under a releasable door 550. The lever is configured to be manually pivoted into ratcheting engagement with the teeth in the drive member 540. Thus, the clinician can manually retract the drive member 540 by using the bailout handle assembly to ratchet the drive member 5400 in the proximal direction “PD”. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein discloses bailout arrangements and other components, arrangements and systems that may also be employed with the various surgical tool assemblies disclosed herein.
• Turning now to FIG. 2, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 includes a surgical end effector 110 that comprises a first jaw and a second jaw. In one arrangement, the first jaw comprises an elongate channel 112 that is configured to operably support a surgical staple cartridge 116 therein. The second jaw comprises an anvil 114 that is pivotally supported relative to the elongate channel 112. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 also includes a lockable articulation joint 120 which can be configured to releasably hold the end effector 110 in a desired position relative to a shaft axis SA. Details regarding various constructions and operation of the end effector 110, the articulation joint 120 and the articulation lock are set forth in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. As can be further seen in FIGS. 2 and 3, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 can include a proximal housing or nozzle 130 and a closure tube assembly 140 which can be utilized to close and/or open the anvil 114 of the end effector 110. As discussed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272575, the closure tube assembly 140 is movably supported on a spine 145 which supports articulation driver arrangement 147 for applying articulation motions to the surgical end effector 110. The spine 145 is configured to, one, slidably support a firing bar 170 therein and, two, slidably support the closure tube assembly 140 which extends around the spine 145. In various circumstances, the spine 145 includes a proximal end that is rotatably supported in a chassis 150. See FIG. 3. In one arrangement, for example, the proximal end of the spine 145 is attached to a spine bearing (not shown) that is configured to be supported within the chassis 150. Such an arrangement facilitates rotatable attachment of the spine 145 to the chassis 150 such that the spine 145 may be selectively rotated about a shaft axis SA relative to the chassis 150.
• Still referring to FIG. 3, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 includes a closure shuttle 160 that is slidably supported within the chassis 150 such that it may be axially moved relative thereto. As can be seen in FIG. 3, the closure shuttle 160 includes a pair of proximally-protruding hooks 162 that are configured for attachment to the attachment pin 516 that is attached to the closure linkage assembly 514 in the handle assembly 500. A proximal closure tube segment 146 of the closure tube assembly 140 is coupled to the closure shuttle 160 for relative rotation thereto. Thus, when the hooks 162 are hooked over the pin 516, actuation of the closure trigger 512 will result in the axial movement of the closure shuttle 160 and ultimately, the closure tube assembly 140 on the spine 145. A closure spring (not shown) may also be journaled on the closure tube assembly 140 and serves to bias the closure tube assembly 140 in the proximal direction “PD” which can serve to pivot the closure trigger 512 into the unactuated position when the shaft assembly 100 is operably coupled to the handle assembly 500. In use, the closure tube assembly 140 is translated distally (direction DD) to close the anvil 114, for example, in response to the actuation of the closure trigger 512. The closure tube assembly 140 includes a distal closure tube segment 142 that is pivotally pinned to a distal end of a proximal closure tube segment 146. The distal closure tube segment 142 is configured to axially move with the proximal closure tube segment 146 relative to the surgical end effector 110. When the distal end of the distal closure tube segment 142 strikes a proximal surface or ledge 115 on the anvil 114, the anvil 114 is pivoted closed. Further details concerning the closure of anvil 114 may be found in the aforementioned U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541 and will be discussed in further detail below. As was also described in detail in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, the anvil 114 is opened by proximally translating the distal closure tube segment 142. The distal closure tube segment 142 has a horseshoe aperture 143 therein that defines a downwardly extending return tab (not shown) that cooperates with an anvil tab 117 formed on the proximal end of the anvil 114 to pivot the anvil 114 back to an open position. In the fully open position, the closure tube assembly 140 is in its proximal-most or unactuated position.
• As was also indicated above, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 further includes a firing bar 170 that is supported for axial travel within the shaft spine 145. The firing bar 170 includes an intermediate firing shaft portion that is configured for attachment to a distal cutting portion or knife bar that is configured for axial travel through the surgical end effector 110. In at least one arrangement, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 includes a clutch assembly (not shown) which can be configured to selectively and releasably couple the articulation driver to the firing bar 170. Further details regarding the clutch assembly features and operation may be found in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. As discussed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, when the clutch assembly is in its engaged position, distal movement of the firing bar 170 can move the articulation driver arrangement 147 distally and, correspondingly, proximal movement of the firing bar 170 can move the articulation driver arrangement 147 proximally. When the clutch assembly is in its disengaged position, movement of the firing bar 170 is not transmitted to the articulation driver arrangement 147 and, as a result, the firing bar 170 can move independently of the articulation driver arrangement 147. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 may also include a slip ring assembly (not shown) which can be configured to conduct electrical power to and/or from the end effector 110 and/or communicate signals to and/or from the end effector 110. Further details regarding the slip ring assembly may be found in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552 is incorporated by reference in its entirety. U.S. Pat. No. 9,345,481, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, is also hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
• Still referring to FIG. 3, the chassis 150 has at least one, and preferably two, tapered attachment portions 152 formed thereon that are adapted to be received within corresponding dovetail slots 507 formed within a distal end of the frame 506. Each dovetail slot 507 may be tapered or, stated another way, be somewhat V-shaped to seatingly receive the tapered attachment portions 152 therein. As can be further seen in FIG. 3, a shaft attachment lug 172 is formed on the proximal end of the firing shaft 170. When the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 is coupled to the handle assembly 500, the shaft attachment lug 172 is received in a firing shaft attachment cradle 542 formed in the distal end of the longitudinally movable drive member 540. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 also employs a latch system 180 for releasably latching the shaft assembly 100 to the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500. In at least one form, for example, the latch system 180 includes a lock member or lock yoke 182 that is movably coupled to the chassis 150. The lock yoke 182 includes two proximally protruding lock lugs 184 that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves 509 in the distal attachment flange of the frame 506. In various forms, the lock yoke 182 is biased in the proximal direction by spring or biasing member. Actuation of the lock yoke 182 may be accomplished by a latch button 186 that is slidably mounted on a latch actuator assembly that is mounted to the chassis 150. The latch button 186 may be biased in a proximal direction relative to the lock yoke 182. As will be discussed in further detail below, the lock yoke 182 may be moved to an unlocked position by biasing the latch button 186 the in distal direction DD which also causes the lock yoke 182 to pivot out of retaining engagement with the distal attachment flange of the frame 506. When the lock yoke 182 is in “retaining engagement” with the distal attachment flange of the frame 506, the lock lugs 184 are retainingly seated within the corresponding lock detents or grooves 509 in the distal end of the frame 506. Further details concerning the latching system may be found in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
• Attachment of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 to the handle assembly 500 will now be described with reference to FIG. 3. To commence the coupling process, the clinician may position the chassis 150 of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 above or adjacent to the distal end of the frame 506 such that the tapered attachment portions 152 formed on the chassis 150 are aligned with the dovetail slots 507 in the frame 506. The clinician may then move the surgical tool assembly 100 along an installation axis IA that is perpendicular to the shaft axis SA to seat the tapered attachment portions 152 in “operable engagement” with the corresponding dovetail receiving slots 507 in the distal end of the frame 506. In doing so, the shaft attachment lug 172 on the firing shaft 170 will also be seated in the cradle 542 in the longitudinally movable drive member 540 and the portions of pin 516 on the closure link 514 will be seated in the corresponding hooks 162 in the closure shuttle 160. As used herein, the term “operable engagement” in the context of two components means that the two components are sufficiently engaged with each other so that upon application of an actuation motion thereto, the components may carry out their intended action, function and/or procedure.
• Returning now to FIG. 1, the surgical system 10 illustrated in that Figure includes four interchangeable surgical tool assemblies 100, 200, 300 and 1000 that may each be effectively employed with the same handle assembly 500 to perform different surgical procedures. The construction of an exemplary form of interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 was briefly discussed above and is discussed in further detail in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. Various details regarding interchangeable surgical tool assemblies 200 and 300 may be found in the various U.S. patent applications that were filed on even date herewith and which have been incorporated by reference herein. Various details regarding interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 will be discussed in further detail below.
• As illustrated in FIG. 1, each of the surgical tool assemblies 100, 200, 300 and 1000 includes a pair of jaws wherein at least one of the jaws is movable between open positions wherein tissue may be captured or manipulated between the two jaws and closed positions wherein the tissue is firmly retained therebetween. The movable jaw or jaws are moved between open and closed positions upon application of closure and opening motions applied thereto from the handle assembly or the robotic or automated surgical system to which the surgical tool assembly is operably coupled. In addition, each of the illustrated interchangeable surgical tool assemblies includes a firing member that is configured to cut tissue and fire staples from a staple cartridge that is supported in one of the jaws in response to firing motions applied thereto by the handle assembly or robotic system. Each surgical tool assembly may be uniquely designed to perform a specific procedure, for example, to cut and fasten a particular type of and thickness of tissue within a certain area in the body. The closing, firing and articulation control systems in the handle assembly 500 or robotic system may be configured to generate axial control motions and/or rotary control motions depending upon the type of closing, firing and articulation system configurations that are employed in the surgical tool assembly. In one arrangement, when a closure control system in the handle assembly or robotic system is fully actuated, one of the closure system control components which may, for example, comprise a closure tube assembly as described above, moves axially from an unactuated position to its fully actuated position. The axial distance that the closure tube assembly moves between its unactuated position to its fully actuated position may be referred to herein as its “closure stroke length”. Similarly, when a firing system in the handle assembly or robotic system is fully actuated, one of the firing system control components which may, for example, comprise the longitudinally movable drive member as described above moves axially from its unactuated position to its fully actuated or fired position. The axial distance that the longitudinally movable drive member moves between its unactuated position and its fully fired position may be referred to herein as its “firing stroke length”. For those surgical tool assemblies that employ articulatable end effector arrangements, the handle assembly or robotic system may employ articulation control components that move axially through an “articulation drive stroke length”. In many circumstances, the closure stroke length, the firing stroke length and the articulation drive stroke length are fixed for a particular handle assembly or robotic system. Thus, each of the surgical tool assemblies must be able to accommodate control movements of the closure, firing and/or articulation components through each of their entire stroke lengths without placing undue stress on the surgical tool components which might lead to damage or catastrophic failure of surgical tool assembly.
• Turning now to FIGS. 4-10, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 includes a surgical end effector 1100 that comprises an elongate channel 1102 that is configured to operably support a staple cartridge 1110 therein. The end effector 1100 may further include an anvil 1130 that is pivotally supported relative to the elongate channel 1102. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 may further include an articulation joint 1200 and an articulation lock 1210 (FIGS. 5 and 8-10) which can be configured to releasably hold the end effector 1100 in a desired articulated position relative to a shaft axis SA. Details regarding the construction and operation of the articulation lock 1210 may be found in in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein. Additional details concerning the articulation lock may also be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,196, filed Feb. 9, 2016, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ARTICULATION MECHANISM WITH SLOTTED SECONDARY CONSTRAINT, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein. As can be seen in FIG. 7, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 can further include a proximal housing or nozzle 1300 comprised of nozzle portions 1302, 1304 as well as an actuator wheel portion 1306 that is configured to be coupled to the assembled nozzle portions 1302, 1304 by snaps, lugs, screws etc. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 can further include a closure tube assembly 1400 which can be utilized to close and/or open the anvil 1130 of the end effector 1100 as will be discussed in further detail below. Primarily referring now to FIGS. 8 and 9, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 can include a spine assembly 1500 which can be configured to support the articulation lock 1210. In the illustrated arrangement, the spine assembly 1500 comprises an “elastic” spine or frame member 1510 which will be described in further detail below. A distal end portion 1522 of the elastic spine member 1510 is attached to a distal frame segment 1560 that operably supports the articulation lock 1210 therein. As can be seen in FIGS. 7 and 8, the spine assembly 1500 is configured to, one, slidably support a firing member assembly 1600 therein and, two, slidably support the closure tube assembly 1400 which extends around the spine assembly 1500. The spine assembly 1500 can also be configured to slidably support a proximal articulation driver 1700.
• As can be seen in FIG. 10, the distal frame segment 1560 is pivotally coupled to the elongate channel 1102 by an end effector mounting assembly 1230. In one arrangement, for example, the distal end 1562 of the distal frame segment 1560 has a pivot pin 1564 formed thereon. The pivot pin 1564 is adapted to be pivotally received within a pivot hole 1234 formed in pivot base portion 1232 of the end effector mounting assembly 1230. The end effector mounting assembly 1230 is attached to the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102 by a spring pin 1105 or other suitable member. The pivot pin 1564 defines an articulation axis B-B that is transverse to the shaft axis SA. See FIG. 4. Such arrangement facilitates pivotal travel (i.e., articulation) of the end effector 1100 about the articulation axis B-B relative to the spine assembly 1500.
• Still referring to FIG. 10, in the illustrated embodiment, the articulation driver 1700 has a distal end 1702 that is configured to operably engage the articulation lock 1210. The articulation lock 1210 includes an articulation frame 1212 that is adapted to operably engage a drive pin 1238 on the pivot base portion 1232 of the end effector mounting assembly 1230. In addition, a cross-link 1237 may be linked to the drive pin 1238 and articulation frame 1212 to assist articulation of the end effector 1100. As indicated above, further details regarding the operation of the articulation lock 1210 and the articulation frame 1212 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. Further details regarding the end effector mounting assembly and crosslink may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245, filed Feb. 9, 2016, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION ARRANGEMENTS, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein. In various circumstances, the elastic spine member 1510 includes a proximal end 1514 which is rotatably supported in a chassis 1800. In one arrangement, for example, the proximal end 1514 of the elastic spine member 1510 has a thread 1516 formed thereon for threaded attachment to a spine bearing (not shown) that is configured to be supported within the chassis 1800. Such an arrangement facilitates rotatable attachment of the elastic spine member 1510 to the chassis 1800 such that the spine assembly 1500 may be selectively rotated about a shaft axis SA relative to the chassis 1800.
• Referring primarily to FIG. 7, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 includes a closure shuttle 1420 that is slidably supported within the chassis 1800 such that it may be axially moved relative thereto. In one form, the closure shuttle 1420 includes a pair of proximally-protruding hooks 1421 that are configured for attachment to the attachment pin 516 that is attached to the closure linkage assembly 514 of the handle assembly 500 as was discussed above. A proximal end 1412 of a proximal closure tube segment 1410 is coupled to the closure shuttle 1420 for relative rotation thereto. For example, a U-shaped connector 1424 is inserted into an annular slot 1414 in the proximal end 1412 of the proximal closure tube segment 1410 and is retained within vertical slots 1422 in the closure shuttle 1420. See FIG. 7. Such arrangement serves to attach the proximal closure tube segment 1410 to the closure shuttle 1420 for axial travel therewith while enabling the closure tube assembly 1400 to rotate relative to the closure shuttle 1420 about the shaft axis SA. A closure spring (not shown) is journaled on the proximal end 1412 of the proximal closure tube segment 1410 and serves to bias the closure tube assembly 1400 in the proximal direction PD which can serve to pivot the closure trigger 512 on the handle assembly 500 (FIG. 3) into the unactuated position when the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 is operably coupled to the handle assembly 500.
• As indicated above, the illustrated interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 includes an articulation joint 1200. Other interchangeable surgical tool assemblies, however, may not be capable of articulation. As can be seen in FIG. 10, upper and lower tangs 1415, 1416 protrude distally from a distal end of the proximal closure tube segment 1410 to be movably coupled to an end effector closure sleeve or distal closure tube segment 1430 of the closure tube assembly 1400. As can be seen in FIG. 10, the distal closure tube segment 1430 includes upper and lower tangs 1434, 1436 that protrude proximally from a proximal end thereof. An upper double pivot link 1220 includes proximal and distal pins that engage corresponding holes in the upper tangs 1415, 1434 of the proximal closure tube segment 1410 and distal closure tube segment 1430, respectively. Similarly, a lower double pivot link 1222 includes proximal and distal pins that engage corresponding holes in the lower tangs 1416 and 1436 of the proximal closure tube segment 1410 and distal closure tube segment 1430, respectively. As will be discussed in further detail below, distal and proximal axial translation of the closure tube assembly 1400 will result in the closing and opening of the anvil 1130 relative to the elongate channel 1102.
• As mentioned above, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 further includes a firing member assembly 1600 that is supported for axial travel within the spine assembly 1500. In the illustrated embodiment, the firing member assembly 1600 includes an intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 that is configured for attachment to a distal cutting portion or knife bar 1610. The firing member assembly 1600 may also be referred to herein as a “second shaft” and/or a “second shaft assembly”. As can be seen in FIGS. 7-10, the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 may include a longitudinal slot 1604 in the distal end thereof which can be configured to receive a tab (not shown) on the proximal end of the knife bar 1610. The longitudinal slot 1604 and the proximal end of the knife bar 1610 can be sized and configured to permit relative movement therebetween and can comprise a slip joint 1612. The slip joint 1612 can permit the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 of the firing member assembly 1600 to be moved to articulate the end effector 1100 without moving, or at least substantially moving, the knife bar 1610. Once the end effector 1100 has been suitably oriented, the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 can be advanced distally until a proximal sidewall of the longitudinal slot 1604 comes into contact with the tab on the knife bar 1610 to advance the knife bar 1610 and fire the staple cartridge 1110 positioned within the elongate channel 1102. As can be further seen in FIGS. 8 and 9, the elastic spine member 1520 has an elongate opening or window 1525 therein to facilitate assembly and insertion of the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 into the elastic spine member 1520. Once the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 has been inserted therein, a top frame segment 1527 may be engaged with the elastic spine member 1520 to enclose the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 and knife bar 1610 therein. Further description of the operation of the firing member assembly 1600 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
• Further to the above, the interchangeable tool assembly 1000 can include a clutch assembly 1620 which can be configured to selectively and releasably couple the articulation driver 1800 to the firing member assembly 1600. In one form, the clutch assembly 1620 includes a lock collar, or sleeve 1622, positioned around the firing member assembly 1600 wherein the lock sleeve 1622 can be rotated between an engaged position in which the lock sleeve 1622 couples the articulation driver 1700 to the firing member assembly 1600 and a disengaged position in which the articulation driver 1700 is not operably coupled to the firing member assembly 1600. When lock sleeve 1622 is in its engaged position, distal movement of the firing member assembly 1600 can move the articulation driver 1700 distally and, correspondingly, proximal movement of the firing member assembly 1600 can move the articulation driver 1700 proximally. When lock sleeve 1622 is in its disengaged position, movement of the firing member assembly 1600 is not transmitted to the articulation driver 1700 and, as a result, the firing member assembly 1600 can move independently of the articulation driver 1700. In various circumstances, the articulation driver 1700 can be held in position by the articulation lock 1210 when the articulation driver 1700 is not being moved in the proximal or distal directions by the firing member assembly 1600.
• Referring primarily to FIG. 7, the lock sleeve 1622 can comprise a cylindrical, or an at least substantially cylindrical, body including a longitudinal aperture 1624 defined therein configured to receive the firing member assembly 1600. The lock sleeve 1622 can comprise diametrically-opposed, inwardly-facing lock protrusions 1626, 1628 and an outwardly-facing lock member 1629. The lock protrusions 1626, 1628 can be configured to be selectively engaged with the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 of the firing member assembly 1600. More particularly, when the lock sleeve 1622 is in its engaged position, the lock protrusions 1626, 1628 are positioned within a drive notch 1605 defined in the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 such that a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force can be transmitted from the firing member assembly 1600 to the lock sleeve 1622. When the lock sleeve 1622 is in its engaged position, the second lock member 1629 is received within a drive notch 1704 defined in the articulation driver 1700 such that the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force applied to the lock sleeve 1622 can be transmitted to the articulation driver 1700. In effect, the firing member assembly 1600, the lock sleeve 1622, and the articulation driver 1700 will move together when the lock sleeve 1622 is in its engaged position. On the other hand, when the lock sleeve 1622 is in its disengaged position, the lock protrusions 1626, 1628 may not be positioned within the drive notch 1605 of the intermediate firing shaft portion 1602 of the firing member assembly 1600 and, as a result, a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force may not be transmitted from the firing member assembly 1600 to the lock sleeve 1622. Correspondingly, the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force may not be transmitted to the articulation driver 1700. In such circumstances, the firing member assembly 1600 can be slid proximally and/or distally relative to the lock sleeve 1622 and the proximal articulation driver 1700. The clutching assembly 1620 further includes a switch drum 1630 that interfaces with the lock sleeve 1622. Further details concerning the operation of the switch drum and lock sleeve 1622 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, and Ser. No. 15/019,196. The switch drum 1630 can further comprise at least partially circumferential openings 1632, 1634 defined therein which can receive circumferential mounts 1305 that extend from the nozzle halves 1302, 1304 and permit relative rotation, but not translation, between the switch drum 1630 and the proximal nozzle 1300. See FIG. 6. Rotation of the nozzle 1300 to a point where the mounts reach the end of their respective slots 1632, 1634 in the switch drum 1630 will result in rotation of the switch drum 1630 about the shaft axis SA. Rotation of the switch drum 1630 may ultimately result in the movement of the lock sleeve 1622 between its engaged and disengaged positions. In alternative embodiments, the nozzle 1300 may be employed to operably engage and disengage the articulation drive system with the firing drive system. As indicated above, clutch assembly 1620 may operate in the various manners described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,196, which have each been herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety.
• In the illustrated arrangement, the switch drum 1630 includes a an L-shaped slot 1636 that extends into a distal opening 1637 in the switch drum 1630. The distal opening 1637 receives a transverse pin 1639 of a shifter plate 1638. In one example, the shifter plate 1638 is received within a longitudinal slot (not shown) that is provided in the lock sleeve 1622 to facilitate axial movement of the lock sleeve 1622 when engaged with the articulation driver 1700. Further details regarding the operation of the shifter plate and shift drum arrangements may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/868,718, filed Sep. 28, 2015, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH SHAFT RELEASE, POWERED FIRING AND POWERED ARTICULATION, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein.
• As also illustrated in FIGS. 7 and 8, the interchangeable tool assembly 1000 can comprise a slip ring assembly 1640 which can be configured to conduct electrical power to and/or from the end effector 1100 and/or communicate signals to and/or from the end effector 1100, back to a microprocessor in the handle assembly or robotic system controller, for example. Further details concerning the slip ring assembly 1640 and associated connectors may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,196 which have each been herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety as well as in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. As also described in further detail in the aforementioned patent applications that have been incorporated by reference herein, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 can also comprise at least one sensor that is configured to detect the position of the switch drum 1630.
• Referring again to FIG. 7, the chassis 1800 includes at least one, and preferably two, tapered attachment portions 1802 formed thereon that are adapted to be received within corresponding dovetail slots 507 formed within the distal end portion of the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500 as was discussed above. As can be further seen in FIG. 7, a shaft attachment lug 1605 is formed on the proximal end of the intermediate firing shaft 1602. As will be discussed in further detail below, when the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 is coupled to the handle assembly 500, the shaft attachment lug 1605 is received in a firing shaft attachment cradle 542 that is formed in the distal end of the longitudinal drive member 540. See FIG. 3.
• Various interchangeable surgical tool assemblies employ a latch system 1810 for removably coupling the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 to the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500. As can be seen in FIG. 7, for example, in at least one form, the latch system 1810 includes a lock member or lock yoke 1812 that is movably coupled to the chassis 1800. In the illustrated embodiment, for example, the lock yoke 1812 has a U-shape with two spaced downwardly extending legs 1814. The legs 1814 each have a pivot lug (not shown) formed thereon that are adapted to be received in corresponding holes 1816 formed in the chassis 1800. Such arrangement facilitates pivotal attachment of the lock yoke 1812 to the chassis 1800. The lock yoke 1812 may include two proximally protruding lock lugs 1818 that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves 509 in the distal end of the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500. See FIG. 3. In various forms, the lock yoke 1812 is biased in the proximal direction by a spring or biasing member 1819. Actuation of the lock yoke 1812 may be accomplished by a latch button 1820 that is slidably mounted on a latch actuator assembly 1822 that is mounted to the chassis 1800. The latch button 1820 may be biased in a proximal direction relative to the lock yoke 1812. The lock yoke 1812 may be moved to an unlocked position by biasing the latch button 1820 the in distal direction which also causes the lock yoke 1812 to pivot out of retaining engagement with the distal end of the frame 506. When the lock yoke 1812 is in “retaining engagement” with the distal end of the frame 506, the lock lugs 1818 are retainingly seated within the corresponding lock detents or grooves 509 in the distal end of the frame 506.
• In the illustrated arrangement, the lock yoke 1812 includes at least one and preferably two lock hooks 1824 that are adapted to contact corresponding lock lug portions 1426 that are formed on the closure shuttle 1420. When the closure shuttle 1420 is in an unactuated position, the lock yoke 1812 may be pivoted in a distal direction to unlock the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 from the handle assembly 500. When in that position, the lock hooks 1824 do not contact the lock lug portions 1426 on the closure shuttle 1420. However, when the closure shuttle 1420 is moved to an actuated position, the lock yoke 1812 is prevented from being pivoted to an unlocked position. Stated another way, if the clinician were to attempt to pivot the lock yoke 1812 to an unlocked position or, for example, the lock yoke 1812 was in advertently bumped or contacted in a manner that might otherwise cause it to pivot distally, the lock hooks 1824 on the lock yoke 1812 will contact the lock lugs 1426 on the closure shuttle 1420 and prevent movement of the lock yoke 1812 to an unlocked position.
• Still referring to FIG. 10, the knife bar 1610 may comprise a laminated beam structure that includes at least two beam layers. Such beam layers may comprise, for example, stainless steel bands that are interconnected by, for example, welding or pinning together at their proximal ends and/or at other locations along their length. In alternative embodiments, the distal ends of the bands are not connected together to allow the laminates or bands to splay relative to each other when the end effector is articulated. Such arrangement permits the knife bar 1610 to be sufficiently flexible to accommodate articulation of the end effector. Various laminated knife bar arrangements are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245. As can also be seen in FIG. 10, a middle support member 1614 is employed to provide lateral support to the knife bar 1610 as it flexes to accommodate articulation of the surgical end effector 1100. Further details concerning the middle support member and alternative knife bar support arrangements are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245. As can also be seen in FIG. 10, a firing member or knife member 1620 is attached to the distal end of the knife bar 1610.
• FIG. 11 illustrates one form of a firing member 1660 that may be employed with the interchangeable tool assembly 1000. In one exemplary form, the firing member 1660 comprises a body portion 1662 that includes a proximally extending connector member 1663 that is configured to be received in a correspondingly shaped connector opening 1614 in the distal end of the knife bar 1610. See FIG. 10. The connector 1663 may be retained within the connector opening 1614 by friction and/or welding or suitable adhesive, etc. The body portion 1662 protrudes through an elongate slot 1104 in the elongate channel 1102 and terminates in a foot member 1664 that extends laterally on each side of the body portion 1662. As the firing member 1660 is driven distally through the surgical staple cartridge 1110, the foot member 1664 rides within a passage 1105 in the elongate channel 1102 that is located under the surgical staple cartridge 1110. As can be seen in FIG. 11, one form of the firing member 1660 may further include laterally protruding central tabs, pins or retainer features 1680. As the firing member 1660 is driven distally through the surgical staple cartridge 1110, the central retainer features 1680 ride on the inner surface 1106 of the elongate channel 1102. The body portion 1662 of the firing member 1660 further includes a tissue cutting edge or feature 1666 that is disposed between a distally protruding hook feature 1665 and a distally protruding top nose portion 1670. As can be further seen in FIG. 11, the firing member 1660 may further include two laterally extending top tabs, pins or anvil engagement features 1665. As the firing member 1660 is driven distally, a top portion of the body 1662 extends through a centrally disposed anvil slot 1138 and the top anvil engagement features 1672 ride on corresponding ledges 1136 formed on each side of the anvil slot 1134. See FIGS. 13 and 14.
• Returning to FIG. 10, the firing member 1660 is configured to operably interface with a sled assembly 1120 that is operably supported within the body 1111 of the surgical staple cartridge 1110. The sled assembly 1120 is slidably displaceable within the surgical staple cartridge body 1111 from a proximal starting position adjacent the proximal end 1112 of the cartridge body 1111 to an ending position adjacent a distal end 1113 of the cartridge body 1111. The cartridge body 1111 operably supports therein a plurality of staple drivers (not shown) that are aligned in rows on each side of a centrally disposed slot 1114. The centrally disposed slot 1114 enables the firing member 1660 to pass therethrough and cut the tissue that is clamped between the anvil 1130 and the staple cartridge 1110. The drivers are associated with corresponding pockets 1116 that open through the upper deck surface 1115 of the cartridge body. Each of the staple drivers supports one or more surgical staple or fastener (not shown) thereon. The sled assembly 1120 includes a plurality of sloped or wedge-shaped cams 1122 wherein each cam 1122 corresponds to a particular line of fasteners or drivers located on a side of the slot 1114. In the illustrated example, one cam 1122 is aligned with one line of “double” drivers that each support two staples or fasteners thereon and another cam 1122 is aligned with another line of “single” drivers on the same side of the slot 1114 that each operably support a single surgical staple or fastener thereon. Thus, in the illustrated example, when the surgical staple cartridge 1110 is “fired”, there will be three lines of staples on each lateral side of the tissue cut line. However, other cartridge and driver configurations could also be employed to fire other staple/fastener arrangements. The sled assembly 1120 has a central body portion 1124 that is configured to be engaged by the hook portion 1665 of the firing member 1660. Thus, when the firing member 1660 is fired or driven distally, the firing member 1660 drives the sled assembly 1120 distally as well. As the firing member 1660 moves distally through the cartridge 1110, the tissue cutting feature 1666 cuts the tissue that is clamped between the anvil assembly 1130 and the cartridge 1110 and the sled assembly 1120 drives the drivers upwardly in the cartridge which drive the corresponding staples or fasteners into forming contact with the anvil assembly 1130.
• In those embodiments wherein the firing member includes a tissue cutting surface, it may be desirable for the elongate shaft assembly to be configured in such a way so as to prevent the inadvertent advancement of the firing member unless an unspent staple cartridge is properly supported in the elongate channel 1102 of the surgical end effector 1100. If, for example, no staple cartridge is present at all and the firing member is distally advanced through the end effector, the tissue would be severed, but not stapled. Similarly, if a spent staple cartridge (i.e., a staple cartridge wherein at least some of the staples have already been fired therefrom) is present in the end effector and the firing member is advanced, the tissue would be severed, but may not be completely stapled, if at all. It will be appreciated that such occurrences could lead to undesirable catastrophic results during the surgical procedure. U.S. Pat. No. 6,988,649 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING A SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT, U.S. Pat. No. 7,044,352 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING A SINGLE LOCKOUT MECHANISM FOR PREVENTION OF FIRING, and U.S. Pat. No. 7,380,695 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING A SINGLE LOCKOUT MECHANISM FOR PREVENTION OF FIRING, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,933, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTING FIRING SYSTEM ACTUATION WHEN A CARTRIDGE IS SPENT OR MISSING each disclose various firing member lockout arrangements. Each of those references is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein.
• An “unfired”, “unspent”, “fresh” or “new” cartridge 1110 means herein that the cartridge 1110 has all of its fasteners in their “ready-to-be-fired positions”. When in that position, the sled assembly 1120 is located in its starting position. The new cartridge 1110 is seated within the elongate channel 1102 and may be retained therein by snap features on the cartridge body that are configured to retainingly engage corresponding portions of the elongate channel 1102. FIGS. 15 and 18 illustrate a portion of the surgical end effector 1100 with a new or unfired surgical staple cartridge 1110 seated therein. As can be seen in those Figures, the sled assembly 1120 is in the starting position. To prevent the firing system from being activated and, more precisely, to prevent the firing member 1660 from being distally driven through the end effector 1110 unless an unfired or new surgical staple cartridge has been properly seated within the elongate channel 1102, the illustrated interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 employs a firing member lockout system generally designated as 1650.
• Referring now to FIGS. 10 and 15-19, in one form, the firing member lockout system 1650 includes movable lock member 1652 that is configured to retainingly engage the firing member 1660 when a surgical staple cartridge 1110 is not properly seated within the elongate channel 1102. The lock member 1652 comprises at least one laterally moving locking portion 1654 that is configured to retainingly engage a corresponding portion of the firing member when the sled assembly 1120 is not present within the cartridge 1110 in its starting position. In the illustrated arrangement, the lock member 1652 employs two laterally moving locking portions 1654 wherein each locking portion 1654 engages a laterally extending portion of the firing member 1660.
• In the illustrated embodiment, the lock member 1652 comprises a generally U-shaped spring member wherein each laterally movable leg or locking portion 1654 extends from a central spring portion 1653 and is configured to move in lateral directions represented by “L” in FIGS. 18 and 19. It will be appreciated that the term “lateral directions” refers to directions that are transverse to the shaft axis SA. The spring or lock member 1652 may be fabricated from high strength spring steel or similar material. The central spring portion 1653 may be seated within a slot 1236 in the end effector mounting assembly 1230. See FIG. 10. As can be seen in FIGS. 15-17, each of the laterally movable legs or locking portions 1654 has a distal end 1656 with a locking window 1658 therein. When the locking member 1652 is in a locked position, the central retainer feature 1680 on each lateral side extends into the corresponding locking window 1658 to retainingly prevent the firing member from being distally axially advanced.
• Operation of the firing member lock out system will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-19. FIGS. 15 and 18 illustrate a portion of the surgical end effector 1100 with a new unfired cartridge 1110 properly installed therein. As can be seen in those Figures, the sled assembly 1120 includes an unlocking feature 1126 that corresponds to each of the laterally movable locking portion 1654. In the illustrated arrangement, an unlocking feature 1126 is provided on or extends proximally from each of the central wedge-shaped cams 1122. In alternative arrangements, the unlocking feature 1126 may comprise a proximally protruding portion of the corresponding wedge-shaped cam 1122. As can be seen in FIG. 18, when the sled assembly 1120 is in its starting position, the unlocking features 1124 engage and bias the corresponding locking portions 1654 laterally in a direction that is transverse to the shaft axis SA. When the locking portions 1654 are in those unlocked orientations, the central retainer features 1680 are not in retaining engagement with their corresponding locking window 1658. When in those orientations, the firing member 1660 may be distally axially advanced (fired). However, when a cartridge is not present in the elongate channel 1102 or the sled assembly has been moved out of its starting position (meaning the cartridge is partially or completely fired), the locking portions 1654 spring laterally into retaining engagement with the firing member 1660. When in that position as illustrated in FIG. 19, the firing member 1660 cannot be moved distally.
• FIGS. 16 and 17 illustrate the retraction of the firing member 1660 back to the starting position after firing the cartridge 1110 and driving the sled assembly 1120 distally. FIG. 16 depicts the initial reengagement of the retaining feature 1680 into its corresponding locking window 1658. FIG. 17 illustrates the retaining feature in its locked position when the firing member 1660 has been fully retracted back to its starting position. To assist in the lateral displacement of the locking portions 1654 when they are each initially contacted by the proximally moving retaining features 1680, each of the retaining features 1680 may be provided with a proximally facing, laterally tapered end portion. Such lockout system prevents actuation of the firing member 1660 when a new unfired cartridge is not present or when a new unfired cartridge is present, but has not been properly seated in the elongate channel 1102. In addition, the lockout system may prevent the clinician from distally advancing the firing member in the case where a spent or partially fired cartridge has been inadvertently properly seated within the elongate channel. Another advantage that may be provided by the lockout system 1650 is that, unlike other firing member lock out arrangements that require movement of the firing member into and out of alignment with the corresponding slots/passages in the staple cartridge, the firing member 1660 remains in alignment with the cartridge passages while in the locked and unlocked position. The locking portions 1654 are designed to move laterally into and out of engagement with corresponding sides of the firing member. Such lateral movement of the locking portions or portion is distinguishable from other locking arrangements that move in vertical directions to engage and disengage portions of the firing member.
• Returning to FIGS. 13 and 14, in one form, the anvil 1130 includes an elongated anvil body portion 1132 and a proximal anvil mounting portion 1150. The elongated anvil body portion 1132 includes an outer surface 1134 that defines two downwardly extending tissue stop members 1136 that are adjacent to the proximal anvil mounting portion 1150. The elongated anvil body portion 1132 also includes an underside 1135 that defines an elongate anvil slot 1138. In the illustrated arrangement shown in FIG. 14, the anvil slot 1138 is centrally disposed in the underside 1135. The underside 1135 includes three rows 1140, 1141, 1142 of staple forming pockets 1143, 1144 and 1145 located on each side of the anvil slot 1138. Adjacent each side of the anvil slot 1138 are two elongate anvil passages 1146. Each passage 1146 has a proximal ramp portion 1148. See FIG. 13. As the firing member 1660 is advanced distally, the top anvil engagement features 1632 initially enter the corresponding proximal ramp portions 1148 and into the corresponding elongate anvil passages 1146.
• Turning to FIGS. 12 and 13, the anvil slot 1138, as well as the proximal ramp portion 1148, extend into the anvil mounting portion 1150. Stated another way, the anvil slot 1138 divides or bifurcates the anvil mounting portion 1150 into two anvil attachment flanges 1151. The anvil attachments flanges 1151 are coupled together at their proximal ends by a connection bridge 1153. The connection bridge 1153 serves to provide support to the anvil attachment flanges 1151 and can serve to make the anvil mounting portion 1150 more rigid than the mounting portions of other anvil arrangements wherein the anvil attachment flanges are not connected at their proximal ends. As can also be seen in FIGS. 12 and 14, the anvil slot 1138 has a wide portion 1139 to accommodate the top portion and top anvil engagement features 1632 of the firing member 1660.
• As can be seen in FIGS. 13 and 20-24, each of the anvil attachment flanges 1151 includes a transverse mounting hole 1156 that is configured to receive a pivot pin 1158 (FIGS. 10 and 20) therethrough. The anvil mounting portion 1150 is pivotally pinned to the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102 by the pivot pin 1158 which extends through mounting holes 1107 in the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102 and the mounting hole 1156 in anvil mounting portion 1150. Such arrangement serves to pivotally affix the anvil 1130 to the elongate channel 1102 for selective pivotal travel about a fixed anvil axis A-A which is transverse to the shaft axis SA. See FIG. 5. The anvil mounting portion 1150 also includes a cam surface 1152 that extends from a centralized firing member parking area 1154 to the outer surface 1134 of the anvil body portion 1132.
• In the illustrated arrangement, the anvil 1130 is moved between an open position and closed positions by axially advancing and retracting the distal closure tube segment 1430. As will be discussed in further detail below, a distal end portion of the distal closure tube segment 1430 has an internal cam surface formed thereon that is configured to cammingly engage the cam surface 1552 or cam surfaces formed on the anvil mounting portion 1150. FIG. 22 illustrates a cam surface 1152 a formed on the anvil mounting portion 1150 so as to establish a single contact path 1155 a with the internal cam surface 1444, for example, on the distal closure tube segment 1430. FIG. 23 illustrates a cam surface 1152 b that is configured relative to the internal cam surface 1444 on the distal closure tube segment to establish two separate and distinct arcuate contact paths 1155 b between the cam surface 1152 on the anvil mounting portion 1150 and internal cam surface 1444 on the distal closure tube segment 1430. In addition to other potential advantages discussed herein, such arrangement may serve to better distribute the closure forces from the distal closure tube segment 1430 to the anvil 1130. FIG. 24 illustrates a cam surface 1152 c that is configured relative to the internal cam surface 1444 of the distal closure tube segment 1430 to establish three distinct zones of contact 1155 c and 1155 d between the cam surfaces on the anvil mounting portion 1150 and the distal closure tube segment 1430. The zones 1155 c, 1155 d establish larger areas of camming contact between the cam surface or cam surfaces on the distal closure tube segment 1430 and the anvil mounting portion 1150 and may serve to better distribute the closure forces to the anvil 1130.
• As the distal closure tube segment 1430 cammingly engages the anvil mounting portion 1150 of the anvil 1130, the anvil 1130 is pivoted about the anvil axis AA which results in the pivotal movement of the distal end of the end 1133 of elongate anvil body portion 1132 toward the surgical staple cartridge 1110 and distal end 1105 of the elongate channel 1102. As the anvil body portion 1132 begins to pivot, it contacts the tissue that is to be cut and stapled which is now positioned between the underside 1135 of the elongate anvil body portion 1132 and the deck 1116 of the surgical staple cartridge 1110. As the anvil body portion 1132 is compressed onto the tissue, the anvil 1130 may experience considerable amounts of resistive forces. These resistive forces are overcome as the distal closure tube 1430 continues its distal advancement. However, depending upon their magnitudes and points of application to the anvil body portion 1132, these resistive forces could tend to cause portions of the anvil 1130 to flex which may generally be undesirable. For example, such flexure may cause misalignment between the firing member 1660 and the passages 1148, 1146 within the anvil 1130. In instances wherein the flexure is excessive, such flexure could significantly increase the amount of firing force required to fire the instrument (i.e., drive the firing member 1660 through the tissue from its starting to ending position). Such excessive firing force may result in damage to the end effector, and/or the firing member, and/or the knife bar, and/or the firing drive system components, etc. Thus, it may be advantageous for the anvil to be constructed so as to resist such flexure.
• FIGS. 25-27 illustrate an alternative anvil embodiment that includes features that may improve the stiffness of the anvil body and its resistance to flexure forces that may be generated during the closing and/or firing processes. The anvil 1130′ may otherwise be identical in construction to the anvil 1130 described above except for the differences discussed herein. As can be seen in those Figures, the anvil 1130′ has an elongate anvil body 1132′ that has an upper body portion 1165 that has an anvil cap 1170 attached thereto. In the embodiment depicted in FIGS. 25-27, the anvil cap 1170 is roughly rectangular in shape and has an outer cap perimeter 1172. The perimeter 1172 of the anvil cap 1170 is configured to be inserted through the correspondingly-shaped opening 1137 formed in the upper body portion 1165 and received on axially extending internal ledge portions 1139 formed therein. See FIG. 27. The internal ledge portions 1139 are configured to support the corresponding long sides 1177 of the anvil cap 1170. In an alternative embodiment, the anvil cap 1170 may be slide onto the internal ledges 1139 through an opening (not shown) in the distal end 1133 of the anvil body 1132′. In yet another embodiment, no internal ledge portions are provided. The anvil body 1132′ and the anvil cap 1170 may be fabricated from suitable metal that is conducive to welding. A first weld 1178 may extend around the entire cap perimeter 1172 of the anvil cap 1170 or it may only be located along the long sides 1177 of the anvil cap 1170 and not the distal end 1173 and/or proximal end 1175 thereof. The first weld 1178 may be continuous or it may be discontinuous or intermittent. In those embodiments where the first weld 1178 is discontinuous or intermittent, the weld segments may be equally distributed along the long sides 1177 of the anvil cap 1170 or the weld segments may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177 or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177. In still other arrangements, the weld segments may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177 of the anvil cap 1170.
• FIGS. 28-30 illustrate an anvil cap 1170′ that is configured to be “mechanically interlocked” to the anvil body 1132′ as well as welded to the upper body portion 1165. In this embodiment, a plurality of retention formations 1182 are formed into the wall 1180 of the upper body portion 1165 that defines opening 1137. As used in this context, the term “mechanically interlocked” means that the anvil cap will remain affixed to the elongate anvil body regardless of the orientation of the elongate anvil body and without any additional retaining or fastening such as welding and/or adhesive, for example. The retention formations 1182 may protrude inwardly into the opening 1137 from the opening wall 1180. The retention formations 1182 may be integrally formed into the wall 1180 or otherwise be attached thereto. The retention formations 1182 are designed to frictionally engage a corresponding portion of the anvil cap 1170′ when it is installed in the opening 1137 to frictionally retain the anvil cap 1170′ therein. In the illustrated embodiment, the retention formations 1182 protrude inwardly into the opening 1137 and are configured to be frictionally received within a correspondingly shaped engagement area 1184 formed in the outer perimeter 1172′ of the anvil cap 1170′. In the illustrated arrangement, the retention formations 1182 only correspond to the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′ and are not provided in the portions of the wall 1180 that correspond to the distal end 1173 or proximal end 1175 of the anvil cap 1170′. In alternative arrangements, the retention formations 1182 may also be provided in the portions of the wall 1180 that correspond to the distal end 1173 and proximal end 1175 of the anvil cap 1170′ as wall as the long sides 1177′ thereof. In still other arrangements, the retention formations 1182 may only be provided in the portions of the wall 1180 that correspond to one or both of the distal and proximal ends 1173, 1175 of the anvil cap 1170′. In still other arrangements, the retention formations 1182 may be provided in the portions of the wall 1180 corresponding to the long sides 1177′ and only one of the proximal and distal ends 1173, 1175 of the anvil cap 1170′. It will be further understood that the retention protrusions in all of the foregoing embodiments may be alternatively formed on the anvil cap with the engagement areas being formed in the elongate anvil body.
• In the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 28-30, the retention formations 1182 are equally spaced or equally distributed along the wall portions 1180 that correspond to the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′. In alternative embodiments, the retention formations 1182 may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177′ or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177′. Stated another way, the spacing between those retention formations adjacent the distal end, the proximal end or both the distal and proximal ends may be less than the spacing of the formations located in the central portion of the anvil cap 1170′. In still other arrangements, the retention formations 1182 may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′. Also in alternative embodiments, the correspondingly shaped engagement areas 1184 may not be provided in the outer perimeter 1172′ or in portions of the outer perimeter 1172′ of the anvil cap 1170′. In other embodiments, the retention formations and correspondingly shaped engagement areas may be provided with different shapes and sizes. In alternative arrangements, the retention formations may be sized relative to the engagement areas so that there is no interference fit therebetween. In such arrangements, the anvil cap may be retained in position by welding, adhesive, etc.
• In the illustrated example, a weld 1178′ may extend around the entire perimeter 1172′ of the anvil cap 1170′ or the weld 1178′ may only be located along the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′ and not the distal end 1173 and/or proximal end 1175 thereof. The weld 1178′ may be continuous or it may be discontinuous or intermittent. In those embodiments where the weld 1178′ is discontinuous or intermittent, the weld segments may be equally distributed along the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′ or the weld segments may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177′ or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177′. In still other arrangements, the weld segments may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177′ of the anvil cap 1170′.
• FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate another anvil arrangement 1130″ that is has an anvil cap 1170″ attached thereto. In the depicted example, the anvil cap 1170″ is roughly rectangular in shape and has an outer cap perimeter 1172″. The outer cap perimeter 1172″ is configured to be inserted through the correspondingly-shaped opening 1137″ in upper body portion 1165 of the anvil body 1132″ and received on axially extending internal ledge portions 1139″ and 1190″ formed therein. See FIG. 32. The ledge portions 1139″ and 1190″ are configured to support the corresponding long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″. In an alternative embodiment, the anvil cap 1170″ may be slid onto the internal ledges 1139″ and 1190″ through an opening (not shown) in the distal end 1133″ of the anvil body 1132′. The anvil body 1132″ and the anvil cap 1170″ may be fabricated from metal material that is conducive to welding. A first weld 1178″ may extend around the entire perimeter 1172″ of the anvil cap 1170″ or it may only be located along the long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″ and not the distal end 1173″ and/or proximal end (not shown) thereof. The weld 1178″ may be continuous or it may be discontinuous or intermittent. It will be appreciated that the continuous weld embodiment has more weld surface area due to the irregularly shape perimeter of the anvil cap 1170″ as compared to the embodiments with a straight perimeter sides such as the anvil caps shown in FIG. 26, for example. In those embodiments where the weld 1178″ is discontinuous or intermittent, the weld segments may be equally distributed along the long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″ or the weld segments may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177″ or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177″. In still other arrangements, the weld segments may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″.
• Still referring to FIGS. 31 and 32, the anvil cap 1170″ may be additionally welded to the anvil body 1132″ by a plurality of second discrete “deep” welds 1192″. For example, each weld 1192″ may be placed at the bottom of a corresponding hole or opening 1194″ provided through the anvil cap 1170″ so that a discrete weld 1192″ may be formed along the portion of the anvil body 1132″ between the ledges 1190″ and 1139″. See FIG. 32. The welds 1192″ may be equally distributed along the long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″ or the welds 1192″ may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177″ or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177″. In still other arrangements, the welds 1192″ may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177″ of the anvil cap 1170″.
• FIG. 33 illustrates another anvil cap 1170′″ that is configured to be mechanically interlocked to the anvil body 1132′″ as well as welded to the upper body portion 1165. In this embodiment, a “tongue-in-groove” arrangement is employed along each long side 1177′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″. In particular, a laterally extending continuous or intermittent tab 1195′″ protrudes from each of the long sides 1177′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″. Each tab 1195″ corresponds to an axial slot 1197′″ formed in the anvil body 1132′″. The anvil cap 1170′″ is slid in from an opening (not shown) in the distal end of the anvil body 1132′″ to “mechanically” affix the anvil cap to the anvil body 1132′″. The tabs 1195′″ and slots 1197′″ may be sized relative to each other to establish a sliding frictional fit therebetween. In addition, the anvil cap 1170′″ may be welded to the anvil body 1132′″. The anvil body 1132′″ and the anvil cap 1170′″ may be fabricated from metal that is conducive to welding. The weld 1178′″ may extend around the entire perimeter 1172′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″ or it may only be located along the long sides 1177′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″. The weld 1178′″ may be continuous or it may be discontinuous or intermittent. In those embodiments where the weld 1178′″ is discontinuous or intermittent, the weld segments may be equally distributed along the long sides 1177′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″ or the weld segments may be more densely spaced closer to the distal ends of the long sides 1177′″ or more densely spaced closer to the proximal ends of the long sides 1177′″. In still other arrangements, the weld segments may be more densely spaced in the center areas of the long sides 1177′″ of the anvil cap 1170′″.
• The anvil embodiments described herein with anvil caps may provide several advantages. One advantage for example, may make the anvil and firing member assembly process easier. That is, the firing member may be installed through the opening in the anvil body while the anvil is attached to the elongate channel. Another advantage is that the upper cap may improve the anvil's stiffness and resistance to the above-mentioned flexure forces that may be experienced when clamping tissue. By resisting such flexure, the frictional forces normally encountered by the firing member 1660 may be reduced. Thus, the amount of firing force required to drive the firing member from its starting to ending position in the surgical staple cartridge may also be reduced.
• As indicated above, as the anvil 1130 begins to pivot, the anvil body 1132 contacts the tissue that is to be cut and stapled which is positioned between the undersurface of the elongate anvil body 1132 and the deck of the surgical staple cartridge 1110. As the anvil body 1132 is compressed onto the tissue, the anvil 1130 may experience considerable amounts of resistive forces. To continue the closure process, these resistive forces must be overcome by the distal closure tube segment 1430 as it cammingly contacts the anvil mounting portion 1150. These resistive forces may be generally applied to the distal closure tube segment 1430 in the vertical directions V which, if excessive, could conceivably cause the distal closure tube segment 1430 to expand or elongate in the vertical direction (distance ID in FIG. 31 may increase). If the distal closure tube 1430 elongates in the vertical directions, the distal closure tube segment 1430 may not be able to effectively close the anvil 1130 and retain the anvil 1130 in the fully closed position. If that condition occurs, the firing member 1660 may encounter dramatically higher resistance which will then require higher firing forces to distally advance the firing member.
• FIGS. 34 and 35 illustrate one form of a closure member for applying a closure motion to a movable jaw of a surgical instrument. In the illustrated arrangement, the closure member comprises, for example, a distal closure tube segment 1430 that has a closure body portion 1470. As discussed above, one form of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 is configured so as to facilitate selective articulation of the surgical end effector 1100. To facilitate such articulation, the distal closure tube segment 1430 is movably coupled to the proximal closure tube segment 1410 by means of an upper tang 1434 and a lower tang 1436 and upper and lower double pivot links 1220 and 1222. See FIG. 10. In one arrangement, the distal closure tube segment 1430 may be machined or otherwise formed from round bar stock manufactured from, for example, suitable metal material. In the illustrated arrangement, the closure body 1470 has an outer surface 1431 and an inner surface 1433 that defines an upper wall portion 1440 that has an upper wall cross-sectional thickness UWT and a lower wall portion 1442 that has a lower wall thickness LWT. The upper wall portion 1440 is located above the shaft axis SA and the lower wall portion 1442 is located below the shaft axis SA. The distal end 1441 of the upper wall portion 1440 has an internal cam surface 1444 formed thereon at a cam angle Θ. Also in the illustrated embodiment, UWT>LWT which serves to provide a longer internal cam surface 1444 than might other wise be attainable if the distal closure tube segment has a uniform wall thickness. A long internal cam surface may be advantageous for transferring the closure forces to the cam surface(s) on the anvil mounting portion 1150. As can also be seen in FIGS. 34 and 35, the transitional sidewalls 1446, 1448 that are located on each side of the shaft axis SA between the upper wall portion 1440 and the lower wall portion 1442 comprise generally flat, vertically extending internal sidewall surfaces 1451, 1453 that may be generally parallel to each other. The transitional sidewalls 1446, 1448 each have a wall thickness that transitions from the upper wall thickness to the lower wall thickness.
• In the illustrated arrangement, the distal closure tube segment 1430 also includes positive jaw or anvil opening features 1462 that correspond to each of the sidewalls 1446 and 1448 and protrude inwardly therefrom. As can be seen in FIGS. 34 and 35, the anvil opening features 1462 are formed on a lateral mounting body 1460 that sized to be received within a correspondingly-shaped cavity 1447, 1449 machined or otherwise formed in the transitional sidewalls 1446, 1448 adjacent the distal end 1438 of the distal closure tube segment 1430. The positive anvil opening features 1462 extend inwardly through corresponding openings 1450, 1452 in the transitional sidewalls 1446, 1448. In the illustrated arrangement, the lateral mounting bodies 1460 are welded to the distal closure tube segment 1430 with welds 1454. In addition to the welds or in alternative to the welds, the lateral mounting bodies 1460 may be retained in place with a mechanical/frictional fit, tongue-in-groove arrangements, adhesive, etc.
• FIGS. 36-41 illustrate one example of the use of the distal closure tube segment 1430 to move the anvil 1130 from a fully closed position to a fully open position. FIGS. 36 and 39 illustrate the position of the distal closure tube segment 1430 and, more particularly the position of one of the positive anvil opening features 1462 when the distal closure tube segment 1430 is in the fully closed position. In the illustrated example, an anvil opening ramp 1162 is formed on the underside of each of the anvil attachment flanges 1151. When the anvil 1130 and the distal closure tube segment 1430 are in their fully closed positions shown in FIG. 36, each of the positive anvil opening features 1462 is located in a cavity 1164 that is established between the anvil opening ramps 1162 and the bottom portion of the elongate channel 1102. When in that position, the positive anvil opening features 1462 do not contact the anvil mounting portion 1150 or at least do not apply any significant opening motions or forces thereto. FIGS. 37 and 40 illustrate the positions of the anvil 1130 and the distal closure tube segment 1430 upon the initial application of an opening motion in the proximal direction PD to the distal closure tube segment 1430. As can be seen in FIG. 37, the positive jaw opening features 1462 have initially contacted the anvil opening ramps 1164 to cause the anvil 1130 to start pivoting to an open position. In the illustrated arrangement, each of the positive anvil opening features 1462 has a ramped or rounded distal end 1463 to facilitate better camming contact with the corresponding anvil opening ramp 1162. In FIGS. 38 and 41, the distal closure tube segment 1430 has been retracted back to its fully retracted position which has caused the positive anvil opening features 1462 to be driven to the distal ends of the anvil opening ramps 1162 which causes the anvil 1130 to be pivoted to its fully open position as shown therein. Other embodiments may not employ the positive jaw opening features, but may rely on springs or other biasing arrangements to bias the anvil to the open position when the distal closure tube segment has been retracted to its proximal-most starting position.
• FIGS. 42 and 43 illustrate another closure member for applying closure motions to a movable jaw of a surgical instrument. In this example, the closure member comprises a distal closure tube segment 1430′ that may be similar to the distal closure tube segment 1430 without the positive anvil opening features. The distal closure tube segment 1430′ has a closure body 1470′ that has an outer surface 1440′ and an inner surface 1433′ that define an upper wall portion 1440′ and a lower wall portion 1442′. As indicated above, it may be desirable to employ as large of internal camming surface 1444′ as possible in order to maximize the camming contact with the camming surface on the anvil mounting portion 1150 to thereby effectively transfer the closure forces thereto. Thus, the upper wall portion 1440′ of the distal closure tube segment 1430′ may be provided with the thickest wall thickness UWT and the lower portion of the distal closure tube segment 1430′ may have the thinnest wall thickness LWT. For reference purposes, the UWT and LWT are measured along a common reference line that extends through a center axis or point C of the distal closure tube segment 1430′. Thus, where UWT is diametrically opposite from LWT, UWT>LWT. Such wall thickness arrangements facilitate formation of a longer internal camming surface 1444′.
• As can be seen in FIG. 43, the distal closure tube segment 1430′ has an outer surface 1431′ that has circular cross-sectional shape. The distal closure tube segment 1430′ may be machined from solid bar stock. In the illustrated example, internal radius R₁ from a first center axis A_inner extends to the inner surface 1433′ and the outer radius R₂ from a second center axis A_outer extends to the outer surface 1431′. In the illustrated example, axis A_inner is offset by distance OR from axis A_outer and R₂>R₁.
• FIG. 44 illustrates another closure member for applying closure motions to a movable jaw of a surgical instrument. In this example, the closure member comprises a distal closure tube segment 1430″ that has a closure body 1470″. The closure body 1470″ has an outer surface 1431′ and an inner surface 1433″ that define an upper wall portion 1440″ that has an upper wall thickness UWT and a lower wall portion 1442″ that has a lower wall thickness LWT and two sidewall portions 1435′ that each has a sidewall thickness SWT. In the illustrated example, UWT>LWT. In addition, SWT>UWT. Thus, SWT>UWT>LWT. In the illustrated arrangement, sidewall portions 1435′ have the same sidewall thickness SWT. In other arrangements, the sidewall portions 1435′ may have different thicknesses. As can be seen in FIG. 44, each sidewall portion 1435′ defines an internal, vertically extending internal surface portion 1437′. In the illustrated embodiment, the vertically extending internal surface portions are approximately parallel to each other. Such thicker vertical sidewall portions 1435′ may help to prevent or at least minimize the vertical elongation of the distal closure tube segment 1430″ when in use.
• In the example depicted in FIG. 45, R₁ and R₂ are measured from a common center point or center axis C and R₁>R₂. Each of the sidewall portions 1435″ of the closure body portion 1470′″ of the distal closure tube segment 1430′″ that extend between the upper portion 1431″ and 1433″ have a sidewall thickness SWT that is approximately equal to the UWT at points along a horizontal reference line HR. The horizontal reference line HR is perpendicular to a vertical reference line VR that extends through the center axis C and along which the UWT and LWT may be measured and compared. Thus, SWT=UWT. In other examples, SWT, when measured along the horizontal reference line HR may be slightly less than the UWT. The SWT may continue to decrease until the side wall portions 1435′ transition into the lower portion 1433′ that has a constant lower wall thickness LWT. Thus, the inner sidewalls 1437″ extend at an angle A₂ when measured from a corresponding vertical reference axis VR′ that is perpendicular to the horizontal reference axis HR and parallel to vertical reference axis VR.
• FIG. 46 illustrates another closure member for applying closure motions to a movable jaw of a surgical instrument. In this example, the closure member comprises a distal closure tube segment 1430″ that has a closure body 1470″ that has a round outer surface 1431″ and a rectangular shaped internal passage 1439 extending therethrough. The outer surface 1431″ is located a distance R from the geometric center point or center axis C. When measured along a vertical reference axis VR that extends through the center point or center axis C as shown, the upper wall thickness UWT is equal to the lower wall thickness LWT. When measure along a horizontal reference axis HR that extends through the center point or center axis C and which is perpendicular to the vertical reference axis VR, the thicknesses SWT of the sidewall portions 1437″ are greater than the upper wall and lower wall thicknesses UWT and LWT. Thus, SWT is greater than UWT and LWT. Stated another way, the portion of the distal closure tube segment 1430″ located above the horizontal reference line HR is a mirror image of the portion of the distal closure tube segment 1430″ located below the horizontal reference line HR. In this example, the side portions 1437″ are thicker than the upper and lower wall portions and may tend to prevent or minimize the tendency of the distal closure tube segment to elongate in the vertical directions. The internal camming surface may be formed on the distal end of the upper wall portion 1440″.
• In the illustrated arrangement, the anvil 1130 is moved between open and closed positions by distally advancing the distal closure tube segment 1430. As can be seen in FIG. 41, when the anvil 1130 is in the fully open position, the distal ends 1163 of the anvil attachment flanges 1151 may extend above the deck surface 1116 of the staple cartridge 1110. When the closure process is commenced by distally advancing the distal closure tube segment in the distal direction DD, the distal ends 1163 of the anvil attachment flanges 1151 extend past the deck surface 1116 of the staple cartridge 1110 to thereby prevent infiltration of tissue therebetween which might hamper the closure process. See FIG. 40. Once the anvil 1130 has been moved to the fully closed position by the distal closure tube segment 1430, the distal ends 1461 of the lateral mounting bodies on the distal closure tube segment 1430 further act as tissue stops to prevent tissue from infiltrating therebetween. See FIG. 41.
• FIG. 47 depicts portion of a surgical end effector 110′ that may be similar to the surgical end effector 110 of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 100 of FIGS. 1 and 2. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47, the anvil 114 includes an elongate body portion 190 and an anvil mounting portion 192. The anvil mounting portion 192 comprises two spaced anvil mounting flanges 194 that protrude proximally from the elongate body portion 190. Each anvil mounting flange 194 has an outwardly extending trunnion 196 thereon. The trunnions 196 are each movably received within a corresponding kidney slot or elongated arcuate trunnion slot 197 that is provided in the elongate channel 112. When the anvil 114 is in a “fully opened” position, the trunnions 196 are generally located in the bottom portions 198 of the elongated arcuate trunnion slots 197. The anvil 114 can be moved to a closed position by distally advancing the distal closure tube segment 142 in the distal direction DD so that the end 148 of the distal closure tube segment 142 rides up a cam surface 193 that is formed on the anvil mounting portion 192 of the anvil 114. As the distal end 148 of the distal closure tube segment 142 is distally advanced along a cam surface 193 on the anvil mounting portion 192, the distal closure tube segment 142 causes the body portion 190 of the anvil 114 to pivot and move axially relative to the surgical staple cartridge 116. When the distal closure tube segment 142 reaches the end of its closure stroke, the distal end 148 of the distal closure tube segment 142 abuts/contacts an abrupt anvil ledge 191 and serves to position the anvil 114 so that the forming pockets (not shown) in the underside of the body portion 190 are properly aligned with the staples in the cartridge. The anvil ledge 191 is defined between the cam surface 193 on the anvil mounting portion 192 and the elongate anvil body portion 190. Stated another way, in this arrangement, the cam surface 193 does not extend to the outermost surface 195 of the anvil body 190. After the distal closure tube 142 has reached this fully extended position, any further application of closure motions/forces to the anvil 114, may cause damage to the anvil and/or the closure system components. As can be seen in FIG. 47, in this arrangement, the closure force F_H is parallel to the shaft axis SA. The distance between an axis or plane T_A passing through the centers of the trunnions 196 to the closure force vector F_H is represented as distance X_R. This distance X_R times the closure force F_H represents a closure moment C_M that is applied to the anvil 114.
• FIGS. 48 and 49 illustrate the closure force configurations for an anvil 1130 of a surgical end effector 1100 of the interchangeable tool assembly 1000. As indicated above, the anvil trunnions 1158 are pivotally mounted within holes 1154 in the elongate channel 1102. Unlike the anvil 114 described above, the anvil 1130 does not move axially. Instead, the anvil 1130 is constrained to only pivot about the anvil axis AA. As the distal closure tube segment 1430 is advanced in the distal direction DD under the horizontal closure force F_H1, the interaction between the internal cam surface 1444 on the distal closure tube segment 1430 and the cam surface 1152 on the anvil mounting portion 1150 results in the distal closure tube segment 1430 experiencing a vertical closure force component V_F. The resultant force vector F_N experienced by the cam surface 1152 on the anvil mounting portion 1150 is “normal to” or perpendicular to the internal cam surface 1444. Angle Θ in FIGS. 48 and 49 represents the angle of the camming surface 1152 as a well as the internal camming surface 1440 to the horizontal. The distance between this resultant force vector F_N and an axis or plane T_A that extends through the centers of the anvil trunnions 1158 is represented as moment arm M_A. This moment arm distance M_A times the resultant force vector F_N represents a closure moment C_M1 that is applied to the anvil 1130. Thus, in applications wherein the horizontal closure forces F_H=F_H1, the actual amount of closure torque applied to anvil 1130 will be greater than the amount of closure torque applied to the anvil 114 because M_A>X_R and therefor the closure moment applied to the anvil 1130 will be greater than the closure moment applied to the anvil 114. FIG. 49 also illustrates the resistive forces established by the tissue during the closure process. F_T represents the force generated by the tissue when the tissue is clamped between the anvil and the staple cartridge. This “counter” moment M_T that is applied to the anvil 1130 equals the distance X_T between the tissue force T_F and the axis or plane T_A that extends through the centers of the anvil trunnions 1158 times the tissue force T_F. Thus, in order to achieve a desired amount of anvil closure, C_M1 must be greater than M_T.
• Returning to the example depicted in FIG. 47, it can be seen that the firing bar 170 is attached to a firing member 174 that, when in a starting or unfired position, is located within the elongate channel 112 and, more particularly, is located completely distal to the distal closure tube segment 142 in a position wherein a top portion 175 of the firing member 174 is in contact with a portion of the anvil 114. Because the firing member 174 is located in a position wherein the top portion 175 thereof can contact the anvil as the anvil 114 is moved to the closed position, such arrangement may result in the need for higher closure forces to move the anvil 114 to a completely or fully closed position. In addition, when the firing system is activated, higher firing forces may be required to overcome the frictional interference between the top portion 175 of the firing member 174 and the anvil 114. Conversely as can be seen in FIG. 48, in the end effector 1100, the firing member 1660 is “parked” in the firing member parking area 1154 that is within the distal closure tube segment 1430. When the firing member 1660 is located within the firing member parking area 1154 within the distal closure tube segment 1430, it is unable to generate significant frictional forces with the anvil. Thus, one of the advantages that may be achieved by parking the firing member 1660 completely within the distal closure tube segment 1430 may be the reduction of the amount of closure force necessary to close the anvil to a fully closed position and/or a reduction in the amount of firing force needed to advance the firing member from the starting to ending position within the end effector. Stated another way, parking the firing member 1660 so that the firing member 1660 is completely proximal to the distal end of the distal closure tube segment 1430 and the internal cam surface 1444 thereon and in a starting position wherein any frictional contact between the firing member and the anvil is eliminated or reduced, may ultimately require lower closure and firing forces to be generated for operation of the end effector.
• As discussed above, excessive flexure of the anvil during the closure and firing processes can lead to the need for undesirably higher firing forces. Thus, stiffer anvil arrangements are generally desirable. Returning to FIGS. 20 and 21, another advantage that may be provided by the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 depicted therein is that the anvil mounting portion 1150 of the anvil 1130 is generally more robust and therefor stiffer than other anvil and elongate channel arrangements. FIG. 50 illustrates use of stiffener gussets 199 between the anvil mounting flanges 194 and the elongate anvil body portion 190. Similar gusset arrangements may also be employed between the anvil attachment flanges 1151 and anvil body 1132 of anvil 1130 to further enhance anvil stiffness.
• As indicated above, the interchangeable surgical tool 1000 includes an elastic spine member 1520. As can be seen in FIGS. 6, 7, 7A, 8 and 51-54, the distal end portion 1522 of the elastic spine member 1520 is separated from the proximal end portion 1524 of the elastic spine member 15 by a stretch feature 1530 formed in the elastic spine member 1520. In addition, a stretch limiting insert 1540 is retainingly supported between the distal end portion 1522 and the proximal end portion 1524. In various arrangements, the elastic spine member 1520 may be fabricated from, for example, suitable polymeric material, rubber, etc. which has a modulus of elasticity designated as ME₁ for reference purposes. The stretch feature 1530 may include a plurality of stretch cavities 1532. As can be seen in FIG. 7A, the illustrated stretch feature 1530 includes four triangular-shaped stretch cavities 1532 that are arranged to define some what flexible wall segments 1534 therebetween. Other shapes and numbers of stretch cavities 1532 may be employed. The stretch cavities 1532 may be molded or machined into the elastic spine member 1520, for example.
• Still referring to FIGS. 6, 7 and 51-54, the stretch limiting insert 1540 comprises a body portion 1541 which has a modulus of elasticity designated as ME₂ for reference purposes. As can be seen in FIG. 6, the body portion 1541 includes two downwardly extending mounting lugs 1542 that are each configured to be seated into mounting cavities 1535 formed in the elastic spine member 1520. See also FIG. 7A. To provide the stretch limiting insert 1540 with a desired amount of stretch capacity and elasticity, the body portion 1541 in the illustrated arrangement is provided with a plurality of upper cavities 1543. The illustrated example includes four upper cavities 1543 that are relatively square or rectangular in shape and which are spaced to define flexible walls 1544 therebetween. Other embodiments may include other numbers and shapes of upper cavities. The body portion 1541 of the illustrated stretch limiting insert 1540 also includes a centrally disposed, downwardly protruding central lug portion 1545 that is configured to be seated in a central cavity 1536 above the stretch feature 1530. See FIG. 7A. In the illustrated example, the central lug portion 1545 includes a pair of central passages 1546 that extend laterally therethrough to define a flexible wall 1547 therebetween.
• Also in the illustrated example, the stretch limiting insert 1540 includes an elongated lateral cavity 1548 that is positioned on each lateral side of the body portion 1541. Only one lateral cavity 1548 may be seen in FIGS. 6 and 51-54. Each elongated lateral cavity 1548 is configured to support a corresponding stretch limiter 1550 therein. Thus, in the described example, two stretch limiters 1550 are employed in the stretch limiting insert 1540. In at least one arrangement, the stretch limiter 1550 includes an elongate body portion 1552 that terminates on each end with a downwardly extending mounting lug 1554. Each mounting lug 1554 is received in a corresponding lug cavity 1549 formed in the body portion 1541. The stretch limiter may have a modulus of elasticity for reference purposes of ME₃. In at least one arrangement, ME₃<ME₂<ME₁.
• Actuation of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 when operably attached to the handle assembly 500 will now be described in further detail with reference to FIGS. 51-54. FIG. 51 illustrates the anvil 1130 in an open position. As can be seen in that Figure, the distal closure tube segment 1430 is in its starting or unactuated position and the positive anvil opening features 1462 have pivoted the anvil 1130 to the open position. In addition, the firing member 1660 is in the unactuated or starting position wherein the upper portion, including the top nose portion 1630, is parked in the firing member parking area 1154 of the anvil mounting portion 1150. When the interchangeable tool assembly 1000 is in this unactuated state, the stretch limiting insert 1540 is in an unstretched state. The axial length of the stretch limiting insert 1540 when in the unstretched state is represented by L_us in FIG. 51. L_us represents the distance between a reference axis A that corresponds to the proximal end of the body portion 1541 of the stretch limiting insert 1540 and a reference axis B that corresponds to the distal end of the body portion 1541 as shown in FIG. 51. The axis labeled F corresponds to the location of the distal end of the staple cartridge 1110 that has been properly seated within the elongate channel 1102. It will be understood that when the tool assembly 1000 is in this unactuated state, the elastic spine member 1520 is in a relaxed unstretched state.
• FIG. 52 illustrates the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 after the closure drive system 510 has been activated as described above to drive the distal closure tube segment 1430 distally in the distal direction DD. As the distal closure tube segment 1430 moves distally, the cam surface 1444 on the distal end 1441 of the upper wall portion 1440 of the distal closure tube segment 1430 cammingly contacts the cam surface 1152 on the anvil mounting portion 1150 and pivots the anvil 1130 to the closed position as shown. The closure drive system 510 moves the distal closure tube segment 1430 through its entire closure stroke distance and then is deactivated and the distal closure tube segment is axially locked or otherwise retained in that position by the closure drive system 510. As the distal closure tube segment 1430 contacts the anvil mounting portion 1150, the closure forces generated by the distal advancement of the distal closure tube segment 1430 on the anvil 1130 will also axially advance the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 in the distal direction DD. The stretch feature 1530 in the elastic spine 1520 will begin to stretch to accommodate this distal advancement of the elongate channel 1102 and anvil 1130. Axis B as shown in FIG. 52 is a reference axis for the stretch limiting insert 1540 when in a relaxed or unstretched state. Axis C corresponds to the end of the stretch limiting insert 1540 after the stretch limiting insert has been stretched into its maximum elongated stated. The distance L_s represents the maximum amount or length that the stretch limiting insert 1540 may elongate. Axis G corresponds to the location of the distal end of the surgical staple cartridge 1110 after the anvil 1130 has been moved to that “first” closed position. The distance L_T between reference axes F and G represents the axial distance that the elongate channel 1102 and the anvil 1130 have traveled during actuation of the closure drive system 510. This distance L_T may be equal to the distance L_S that the stretch limiting insert 1540 was stretched during the closure process as limited by the stretch limiter 1550.
• Returning to FIG. 51, it can be noted that there is a space S between each mounting lug 1554 of the stretch limiter 1550 and the inner walls 1551 of each of the lug cavities 1549 prior to commencement of the closure process. As can be seen in FIG. 52 the spaces S are gone. That is, each of the mounting lugs 1554 abuts its corresponding cavity wall 1549 in the stretch limiting insert 1540. Thus the stretch limiter 1550 serves to limit the amount of elongation experienced by the stretch limiting insert 1540 which in turn limits the amount of distal travel of the elongate channel 1102 and anvil 1130 relative to the proximal end portion 1524 of the elastic spine 1520. The distal closure tube 1430 is axially locked in position by the closure drive system 510. When in that position, the anvil 1130 is retained in a ‘first” closed position relative to the surgical staple cartridge 1110. Because the firing drive system 530 has yet to be actuated, the firing member 1660 has not moved and remains parked in the firing member parking area 1154. The position of the underside of the anvil 1130 when in the “first” closed position is represented by axis K in FIGS. 52 and 53.
• FIG. 53 illustrates the position of the firing member 1660 after the firing drive system 530 has been initially actuated. As can be seen in that Figure, the firing member 1660 has been distally advanced out of the firing member parking area 1154. The top portion of the firing member 1660 and, more specifically, each of the top anvil engagement features 1672 has entered the proximal ramp portion 1138 of the corresponding axial passage 1146 in the anvil 1130. At this point in the process, the anvil 1130 may be under considerable bending stress caused by the tissue that is clamped between the underside of the anvil 1130 and the deck of the staple cartridge 1110. This bending stress, as well as the frictional resistance between the various portions of the firing member and the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102, serve to essentially retain the elongate channel 1102 and the distal closure tube segment in a static condition while the firing member 1660 is initially distally advanced. During this time period, the amount of force required to fire the firing member 1660 or, stated another way, the amount of force required to distally push the firing member 1660 through the tissue that is clamped between the anvil 1130 and the cartridge 1110 is increasing. See line 1480 in FIG. 55. Also during this time period, the stretch limiting insert is trying to retract the elongate channel 1102 and anvil 1130 in the proximal direction PD into the distal closure tube segment 1430. Once the amount of friction between the firing member 1660 and the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 is less than the retraction force generated by the stretch limiting insert 1540, the stretch limiting insert 1540 will cause the elongate channel 1102 and anvil 1130 to be drawn proximally further into the distal closure tube segment 1430. The position of the distal end 1113 of the staple cartridge 1110 after the elongate channel 1102 and anvil 1130 have traveled in the proximal direction PD is represented as position H in FIG. 54. The axial distance that the elongate channel 1102 and the anvil 1130 traveled in the proximal direction PD is represented as distance I in FIG. 54. This proximal movement of the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 into the distal closure tube segment 1430 will result in the application of additional closure forces to the anvil 1130 by the distal closure tube segment 1430. Line M in FIG. 54 represents the “second” closed position of the anvil 1130. The distance between position K and position M which is represented as distance N comprises the vertical distance that the distal end 1133 of the anvil body 1132 traveled between the first closed position and the second closed position.
• The application of additional closure forces to the anvil 1130 by the distal closure tube segment 1430 when the anvil 1130 is in the second closed position, resists the amount of flexure forces applied to the anvil 1130 by the tissue that is clamped between the anvil 1130 and the cartridge 1110. Such condition may lead to better alignment between the passages in the anvil body 1130 and the firing member 1660 which may ultimately reduce the amount of frictional resistance that the firing member 1660 experiences as it continues to advance distally through the end effector 1100. Thus, the amount of firing force required to advance the firing member through the balance of its firing stroke to the ending position may be reduced. This reduction of the firing force can be seen in the chart in FIG. 55. The chart depicted in FIG. 55 compares the firing force (Energy) required to fire the firing member from the beginning to the end of the firing process. Line 1480 represents the amount of firing force required to move the firing member 1660 from its starting to ending position when the end effector 1100 is clamping tissue therein. Line 1482, for example, represents the amount of firing force required to move the firing member the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 described above. Line 1482 represents the firing force required to move the firing member 174 from its starting to ending position through tissue that is clamped in the end effector 110 or 110′. As can be seen from that chart, the firing forces required by both of the surgical tool assemblies 100, 1000 are substantially the same or very similar until the point in time 1484 wherein the elastic spine assembly 1510 of the interchangeable tool assembly 1000 results in an application of a second amount of closure force to the anvil. As can be seen in the chart of FIG. 55, when the second amount of closure force is experienced by the anvil 1130 (point 1484), the amount of closure force required to complete the firing process is less than the amount of closure force required to complete the closing process in tool assembly 100.
• FIG. 56 compares the amount of firing load required to move a firing member of various surgical end effectors from a starting position (0.0) to an ending position (1.0). The vertical axis represents the amount of firing load and the horizontal axis represents the percentage distance that the firing member traveled between the starting position (0.0) and the ending position (1.0). Line 1490 depicts the firing force required to fire, for example, the firing member of a surgical tool assembly 100 or similar tool assembly. Line 1492 depicts the firing force required to fire the firing member of a surgical tool assembly that employs the various firing member improvements and configurations that may be disclosed in, for example, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,917, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING STAPLES WITH DIFFERENT CLAMPING BREADTHS, and the other above-mentioned U.S. patent applications that were filed on even date herewith and which have been incorporated by reference herein in their respective entirety. Line 1494 depicts the firing force required to fire the firing member from its starting to ending position of surgical tool assemblies that employ at least some of the features and arrangements disclosed herein for stiffening the anvil. Line 1496 depicts the firing force required to fire, for example, surgical tool assemblies that employ the elastic spine arrangement and at least some of the features and arrangements disclosed herein for stiffening the anvil. As can be seen in that Figure, the surgical tool assembly that employs the elastic spine arrangement and at least some of the anvil stiffening arrangements disclosed herein have a much lower force-to-fire requirement.
• FIG. 57 provides a side-by-side comparison of two anvils. A portion of a first anvil 2030 of an end effector 2000 is depicted in the right half of FIG. 57 and a portion of a second anvil 2030′ of an end effector 2000′ is depicted in the left half of FIG. 57. The anvil 2030 comprises a first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a, a second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b, and a third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c. The anvil 2030 further comprises a longitudinal slot 2033 which is configured to receive a firing member, such as firing member 2040, for example, as the firing member is advanced through a staple firing stroke. The first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a is positioned intermediate the longitudinal slot 2033 and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b, and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b is positioned intermediate the first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a and the third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c. As a result, the first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a comprises an inner row, the third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c comprises an outer row, and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b comprises a middle or intermediate row.
• Similar to the above, the anvil 2030′ comprises a first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a, a second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b, and a third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c. The anvil 2030′ further comprises a longitudinal slot 2033′ which is configured to receive a firing member, such as firing member 2040′, for example, as the firing member is advanced through a staple firing stroke. The first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a is positioned intermediate the longitudinal slot 2033′ and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b, and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b is positioned intermediate the first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a and the third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c. As a result, the first longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 a comprises an inner row, the third longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 c comprises an outer row, and the second longitudinal row of forming pockets 2032 b comprises a middle or intermediate row.
• The anvil 2030 comprises a flat, or an at least substantially flat, tissue engaging surface 2031. The forming pockets 2032 a, 2032 b, and 2032 c are defined in the flat surface 2031. The flat surface 2031 does not have steps defined therein; however, embodiments are envisioned in which the anvil 2030 can comprise a stepped tissue engaging surface. For instance, the anvil 2030′ comprises a stepped tissue engaging surface 2031′. In this embodiment, the forming pockets 2032 a and 2032 b are defined in a lower step and the forming pockets 2032 c are defined in an upper step.
• The firing member 2040′ comprises a coupling member 2042′ including a cutting portion 2041. The cutting portion 2041 is configured and arranged to incise tissue captured between the anvil 2030′ and a staple cartridge 2010 (FIG. 58), for example. The firing member 2040′ is configured to push a sled having inclined surfaces distally during a staple firing stroke. The inclined surfaces are configured to lift staple drivers within the staple cartridge 2010 to form staples 2020 against the anvil 2030′ and eject the staples 2020 from the staple cartridge 2010. The coupling member 2042′ comprises projections, or cams, 2043′ extending laterally therefrom which are configured to engage the anvil 2030′ during the staple firing stroke. Referring to FIG. 60, the projections 2043′ are comprised of longitudinally elongate shoulders extending from the coupling member 2042′. In other embodiments, the projections 2043′ comprise a cylindrical pin which extends through the coupling member 2042′. In any event, the projections 2043′ have flat lateral sides, or ends, 2047′.
• The longitudinal slot 2033′ comprises lateral portions 20331′ extending laterally from a central portion 2033 c′ which are configured to receive the projections 2043′. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the lateral portions 20331′ of the longitudinal slot 2033′ have a rectangular, or at least substantially rectangular, configuration having sharp corners. Each lateral portion 20331′ of the slot 2033′ comprises a longitudinal cam surface 2035′ configured to be engaged by the projections 2043′ during the staple firing stroke. Each longitudinal cam surface 2035′ is defined on the upper side of a ledge 2037′ which extends longitudinally along the slot 2033′. Each longitudinal ledge 2037′ comprises a beam including a fixed end attached to the main body portion of the anvil 2030′ and a free end configured to move relative to the fixed end. As such, each longitudinal ledge 2037′ can comprise a cantilever beam.
• The coupling member 2042′ further comprises a foot, or cam, 2044 (FIG. 58) configured to engage the staple cartridge 2010, or a jaw supporting the staple cartridge 2010, during the staple firing stroke. Moreover, the projections 2043′ and the foot 2044 co-operate to position the anvil 2030′ and the staple cartridge 2010 relative to one another. When the anvil 2030′ is movable relative to the staple cartridge 2010, the coupling member 2042′ can cam the anvil 2030′ into position relative to the staple cartridge 2010. When the staple cartridge 2010, or the jaw supporting the staple cartridge 2010, is movable relative to the anvil 2030′, the coupling member 2042′ can cam the staple cartridge 2010 into position relative to the anvil 2030′.
• Further to the above, the firing member 2040 comprises a coupling member 2042 including a cutting portion 2041. The cutting portion 2041 is configured and arranged to incise tissue captured between the anvil 2030 and a staple cartridge 2010 (FIG. 58). The firing member 2040 is configured to push a sled having inclined surfaces distally during a staple firing stroke. The inclined surfaces are configured to lift staple drivers within the staple cartridge 2010 to form staples 2020 against the anvil 2030 and eject the staples 2020 from the staple cartridge 2010. The coupling member 2042 comprises projections, or cams, 2043 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to engage the anvil 2030 during the staple firing stroke. The projections 2043 have curved, or rounded, lateral sides, or ends, 2047. The lateral ends 2047 of the projections 2043 are entirely curved or fully-rounded. Each lateral end 2047 comprises an arcuate profile extending between a top surface of a projection 2043 and a bottom surface of the projection 2043. In other embodiments, the lateral ends 2047 of the projections 2043 are only partially curved.
• The longitudinal slot 2033 comprises lateral portions 20331 extending laterally from a central portion 2033 c which are configured to receive the projections 2043. Each lateral portion 20331 of the slot 2033 comprises a longitudinal cam surface 2035 configured to be engaged by the projections 2043 during the staple firing stroke. Each longitudinal cam surface 2035 is defined on the upper side of a ledge 2037 which extends longitudinally along the slot 2033. Each longitudinal ledge 2037 comprises a beam including a fixed end attached to the main body portion of the anvil 2030 and a free end configured to move relative to the fixed end. As such, each longitudinal ledge 2037 can comprise a cantilever beam. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the lateral portions of the longitudinal slot 2033 comprise a curved, or rounded, profile which match, or at least substantially match, the curved ends 2047 of the projections 2043.
• The coupling member 2042 further comprises a foot, or cam, 2044 (FIG. 58) configured to engage the staple cartridge 2010, or a jaw supporting the staple cartridge 2010, during the staple firing stroke. Moreover, the projections 2043 and the foot 2044 co-operate to position the anvil 2030 and the staple cartridge 2010 relative to one another. When the anvil 2030 is movable relative to the staple cartridge 2010, the coupling member 2042 can cam the anvil 2030 into position relative to the staple cartridge 2010. When the staple cartridge 2010, or the jaw supporting the staple cartridge 2010, is movable relative to the anvil 2030, the coupling member 2042 can cam the staple cartridge 2010 into position relative to the anvil 2030.
• Referring again to FIG. 57, the lateral portions 20331′ of the longitudinal slot 2033′ extend a distance 2034′ from a centerline CL of the anvil 2030′. The lateral portions 20331′ extend over, or behind, the forming pockets 2032 a in the anvil 2030′. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the lateral ends of the lateral portions 20331′ are aligned with the outer edges of the forming pockets 2032 a. Other embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral portions 20331′ extend laterally beyond the forming pockets 2032 a, for example. That said, referring to FIG. 59, the ledges 2037′ of the anvil 2030′ are long and, in certain instances, the ledges 2037′ can deflect significantly under load. In some instances, the ledges 2037′ can deflect downwardly such that a large portion of the drive surfaces 2045′ defined on the bottom of the projections 2043′ are not in contact with the cam surfaces 2035′. In such instances, the contact between the projections 2043′ and the cam surfaces 2035′ can be reduced to a point, such as point 2047′, for example. In some instances, the contact between the projections 2043′ and the cam surfaces 2035′ can be reduced to a longitudinally extending line, which may appear to be a point when viewed from the distal end of the end effector, as illustrated in FIG. 59.
• Moreover, referring again to FIG. 57, the projections 2043′ extend over, or behind, the forming pockets 2032 a in the anvil 2030′. The lateral ends of the projections 2043′ extend over a longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. Other embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral ends of the projections 2043′ are aligned with the longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. Certain embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral ends of the projections 2043′ do not extend to the longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. In any event, referring again to FIG. 59, the projections 2043′ can deflect upwardly, especially when the projections 2043′ are long, such that a large portion of the drive surfaces 2045′ of the projections 2043′ are not in contact with the cam surfaces 2035′. This condition can further exacerbate the condition discussed above in connection with the ledges 2037′. That being said, the projections 2043′ may be able to better control the staple formation process occurring in the forming pockets 2032 a, and/or the forming pockets 2032 b and 2032 c, when the projections 2043′ extend to the outer edge of the forming pockets 2032 a or beyond, for instance.
• Further to the above, the ledges 2037′ and the projections 2043′ can deflect in a manner which causes the load flowing between the firing member 2040′ and the anvil 2030′ to be applied at the inner ends of ledges 2037′. As illustrated in FIG. 59, the contact points 2048′ are at or near the inner ends of the ledges 2037′. The deflection of the ledges 2037′, and the projections 2043′, is the same or similar to that of cantilever beams. As the reader should appreciate, the deflection of a cantilever beam is proportional to the cube of the beam length when the load is applied at the end of the cantilever beam. In any event, gaps between the ledges 2037′ and the projections 2043′ can be created when the ledges 2037′ and/or the projections 2043′ deflect. Such gaps between portions of the ledges 2037′ and the projections 2043′ means that the forces flowing therebetween will flow through very small areas which will, as a result, increase the stress and strain experienced by the ledges 2037′ and projections 2043′. This interaction is represented by stress risers, or concentrations, 2039′ and 2049′ in FIGS. 61 and 62 where stress risers 2039′ are present in the ledges 2037′ and stress risers 2049′ are present at the interconnection between the projections 2043′ and the coupling member 2042′. Other stress risers, or concentrations, may be present but, as discussed below, it is desirable to reduce or eliminate such stress risers.
• Referring again to FIGS. 57 and 58, the lateral portions 20331 of the longitudinal slot 2033 each extend a distance 2034 from a centerline CL of the anvil 2030. The distance 2034 is shorter than the distance 2034′. Nonetheless, the lateral portions 20331 extend over, or behind, the forming pockets 2032 a in the anvil 2030. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the lateral ends of the lateral portions 20331 are not aligned with the outer edges of the forming pockets 2032 a. Moreover, the lateral ends of the lateral portions 20331 do not extend beyond the outer edges of the forming pockets 2032 a; however, the lateral portions 20331 extend over the longitudinal centerlines 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. Further to the above, the ledges 2037 are shorter than the ledges 2037′. As such, the ledges 2037 will experience less deflection, stress, and strain than the ledges 2037′ for a given force applied thereto.
• Other embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral portions 20331 of the slot 2033 do not extend to the longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. In certain embodiments, the lateral portions 20331 do not extend laterally over or overlap the forming pockets 2032 a. Such shorter lateral portions 20331, further to the above, can reduce the deflection, stress, and strain in the ledges 2037. Owing to the reduced deflection of the ledges 2037, the drive surfaces 2045 defined on the bottom of the projections 2043 can remain in contact with the cam surfaces 2035 of the ledges 2037. In such instances, the contact area between the projections 2043 and the cam surfaces 2035 can be increased as compared to the contact area between the projections 2043′ and the cam surfaces 2035′.
• Further to the above, the cross-sectional thickness of the ledges 2037 isn't constant, unlike the ledges 2037′ which have a constant cross-sectional thickness. The ledges 2037 have a tapered cross-sectional thickness where the base of each ledge 2037 is wider than its inner end owing to the rounded lateral ends of the lateral slot portions 20331. Such a configuration can serve to stiffen or strengthen the ledges 2037 and reduce the deflection, stress, and strain of the ledges 2037 as compared to the ledges 2037′. In at least one instance, a portion of a ledge 2037 is tapered while another portion of the ledge 2037 has a constant cross-sectional thickness. In at least one other instance, the entirety of a ledge 2037 can be tapered such that none of the cross-sectional thickness is constant.
• Moreover, referring again to FIGS. 57 and 58, the projections 2043 extend over, or behind, the forming pockets 2032 a in the anvil 2030. The lateral ends of the projections 2043 do not extend over the longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. Other embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral ends of the projections 2043 are aligned with the longitudinal centerline 2062 a of the forming pockets 2032 a. Certain embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral ends of the projections 2043 do not extend over the forming pockets 2032 a at all. In any event, the upward deflection of the projections 2043 may be less than the projections 2043′ and, as a result, a larger contact area can be present between the drive surfaces 2045 and the cam surfaces 2035.
• Further to the above, the ledges 2037 and the projections 2043 can deflect in a manner which causes the load flowing between the firing member 2040 and the anvil 2030 to be applied laterally along the lengths of the ledges 2037 instead of at a single point and/or at end of the ledges 2037. As a result, the forces flowing therebetween will flow through larger areas which will, as a result, reduce the stress and strain experienced by the ledges 2037 and projections 2043 which can reduce or eliminate the stress risers discussed above in connection with the ledges 2037′ and the projections 2043′, for example.
• Referring again to FIG. 58, the foot 2044 of the coupling member 2042 is wider than the projections 2033. Stated another way, the lateral width of the foot 2044 is wider than the width between the lateral ends of the projections 2033. In such instances, the foot 2044 can deflect or strain more than the projections and, as a result, the deflection of the projections 2033 can be reduced. Alternative embodiments are envisioned in which the lateral width of the foot 2044 is the same as or less than the width between the lateral ends of the projections 2033; however, such embodiments can be otherwise configured to provide the desired deflection and/or strain within the projections 2033.
• As discussed above, an end effector can comprise an anvil, for example, which is movable between an open position and a closed position. In some instances, the anvil is moved toward its closed position by a firing member, such as firing member 2040 or 2040′, for example, when the firing member is moved distally. In other instances, the anvil is moved toward its closed position prior to the firing member being advanced distally to perform a staple firing stroke. In either event, the anvil may not move into its entirely closed position until the firing member approaches or reaches the end of its staple firing stroke. As a result, the anvil is progressively closed by the firing member. In at least one such instance, the anvil may progressively close owing to thick tissue captured between the anvil and the staple cartridge. In some instances, the anvil may actually deflect or deform during the staple firing stroke of the firing member. Such circumstances are generally controlled, however, by the upper projections and the bottom foot of the firing member.
• Turning now to FIG. 60, the drive surfaces 2045′ defined on the projections 2043′ are flat, or at least substantially flat. Moreover, the drive surfaces 2045′ are configured to flushingly engage the flat, or at least substantially flat, cam surfaces 2035′ defined on the anvil 2030′ when the anvil 2030′ is in a completely closed position. Stated another way, the drive surfaces 2045′ engage the cam surfaces 2035′ in a face-to-face relationship when the anvil 2030′ is in a completely flat orientation. A flat orientation of the anvil 2030′ is depicted in phantom in FIG. 60. In such instances, the drive surfaces 2045′ are parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the longitudinal path of the firing member 2040′ during the staple firing stroke. As discussed above, however, the anvil 2030′ may progressively close during the firing stroke and, as a result, the anvil 2030′ may not always be in an entirely closed position. As a result, the drive surfaces 2045′ may not always be aligned with the cam surfaces 2035′ and, in such instances, the projections 2043′ may gouge into the ledges 2037′ of the anvil 2030. FIG. 60 depicts such instances with solid lines.
• Further to the above, the drive surfaces 2045′ of the projections 2043′ and/or the cam surfaces 2035′ defined on the ledges 2037′ can plastically deform if the firing member 2040′ has to progressively close the anvil 2030′ into its entirely closed position. In certain instances, the cam surfaces 2035′ can gall, for example, which can increase the force needed to complete the staple firing stroke. More specifically, plastic strain of the projections 2043′ and/or the anvil ledges 2037′ can cause energy losses as the metal is deformed beyond the plastic limits. At that point, galling occurs and the frictional co-efficient of the coupling increases substantially. The energy losses can be in the order of about 10%-30%, for example, which can increase the force needed to fire the firing member in the order of about 10%-30%. Moreover, the force needed to complete subsequent staple firing strokes with the end effector 2000′ may increase in such instances in the event that the end effector 2000′ is reused.
• Turning now to FIGS. 63-65, a firing member 2140 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2142 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2142 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2142 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2142 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2142 also comprises projections 2143 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2143 comprises a drive surface 2145 defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2143 further comprises a proximally-extending cam transition 2147 and a radiused-transition 2149 extending around the perimeter of the projection 2143. The coupling member 2142 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2140 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2140 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, the drive surfaces 2145 of the projections 2143 are not parallel to the longitudinal path 2160 of the firing member 2140. Rather, the drive surfaces 2145 extend transversely to the longitudinal path 2160. In at least one instance, the distal end of each drive surface 2145 is positioned further away from the longitudinal path 2160 than the proximal end. Such an arrangement can reduce or eliminate the problems described above in connection with the progressive closure of the anvil 2130. More specifically, in at least one instance, if the anvil 2130 will move through a range of motion between about 4 degrees and about 0 degrees with respect to the longitudinal path 2160 during the progressive closure, then the drive surface 2145 could be oriented at about 2 degrees with respect to the longitudinal path 2160, for example, which represents the midpoint in the range of progressive closure. Other embodiments are possible. For instance, if the anvil 2130 will move through a range of motion between about 1 degree and about 0 degrees with respect to the longitudinal path 2160 during the progressive closure, then the drive surfaces 2145 could be oriented at about 1 degree with respect to the longitudinal path 2160, for example, which represents the upper bound in the range of progressive closure. In various instances, the firing member 2140 may be required to progressively close the anvil 2130 through a 5 degree range of motion, for example. In other instances, the firing member 2140 may be required to progressively the anvil 2130 through a 10 degree range of motion, for example. In some instances, the anvil 2130 may not reach its completely closed position and, as a result, the progressive closure of the anvil 2130 may not reach 0 degrees.
• Further to the above, the drive surface 2145 of the projection 2143 is not parallel to the drive surface of the foot 2144. Referring primarily to FIG. 64, the drive surface 2145 extends along an axis 2183 and the drive surface of the foot 2144 extends along an axis 2184. In at least one instance, the drive surface 2145 is oriented at an about 0.5 degree angle with respect to the drive surface of the foot 2144, for example. Other instances are envisioned in which the drive surface 2145 is oriented at an about 1 degree angle with respect to the drive surface of the foot 2144, for example. Certain instances, are envisioned in which the drive surface 2145 is oriented between about 0.5 degrees and about 5 degrees with respect to the drive surface of the foot 2144, for example. The drive surface of the foot 2144 is parallel to the longitudinal path 2160; however, other embodiments are envisioned in which the drive surface of the foot 2144 is not parallel to the longitudinal path 2160.
• The examples provided above were discussed in connection with a movable anvil; however, it should be understood that the teachings of such examples could be adapted to any suitable movable jaw, such as a movable staple cartridge jaw, for example. Similarly, the examples provided elsewhere in this application could be adapted to any movable jaw.
• Turning now to FIGS. 66-68, a firing member 2240 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2242 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2242 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2242 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2242 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2242 also comprises projections 2243 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2243 comprises a drive surface 2245 defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2243 further comprises a radiused-transition 2249 extending around the perimeter thereof. The coupling member 2242 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2240 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2240 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each projection 2243 comprises a leading, or proximal, end 2251 configured to engage the anvil and, in addition, a trailing end. The leading end of each projection 2243 is different than the lagging, or trailing, end of the projection 2243. The leading end 2251 comprises a radius which extends from the bottom drive surface 2245 of the projection 2243 to a location positioned above a longitudinal centerline 2250 of the projection 2243. The leading end 2251 comprises a single radius of curvature; however, the leading end 2251 can be comprised of more than one radius of curvature. Each projection 2243 further comprises a radiused edge 2259 between the radiused leading end 2251 and the top surface of the projection 2243. The radius of curvature of the edge 2259 is smaller than the radius of curvature of the leading end 2251. Other embodiments are envisioned in which the entirety of, or at least a portion of, the leading end 2251 is linear. In any event, the configuration of the leading end 2251 can shift the force, or load, transmitted between the firing member 2240 and the anvil away from the leading end 2251 toward the trailing end of the projection 2243. Stated another way, the configuration of the leading end 2251 may prevent the leading end 2251 from becoming the focal point of the transmitted force between the firing member 2240 and the anvil. Such an arrangement can prevent or reduce the possibility of the firing member 2240 becoming stuck against the anvil and can reduce the force required to move the firing member 2240 distally.
• Turning now to FIGS. 69-71, a firing member 2340 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2342 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2342 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2342 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2342 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2342 also comprises projections 2343 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2343 comprises a drive surface defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2343 further comprises a radiused-transition 2349 extending around the perimeter thereof. The coupling member 2342 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2340 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2340 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each projection 2343 comprises a radiused leading end 2351. The leading end 2351 is similar to the leading end 2251 and comprises a curved surface which extends across the centerline 2350 of the projection 2343. The leading end 2251 has a different configuration than the trailing end of the projection 2243. Each projection 2343 further comprises a lateral side, or end, 2352. Each lateral end 2352 comprises a flat surface which is positioned intermediate radiused, or curved, edges 2347. A first radiused edge 2347 is positioned intermediate a top surface of the projection 2343 and the lateral end 2352 and, in addition, a second radiused edge 2347 is positioned intermediate a bottom surface of the projection 2343 and the lateral end 2352.
• Turning now to FIGS. 72-74, a firing member 2440 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2442 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2442 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2442 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2442 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2442 also comprises projections 2443 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2443 comprises a drive surface 2445 defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2443 further comprises a radiused-transition extending around the perimeter thereof. The coupling member 2442 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2440 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2440 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, the lateral sides, or ends, of each projection 2443 are defined by more than one radius of curvature. Each projection 2443 comprises a first radius of curvature 2447 a extending from the bottom drive surface 2445 and a second radius of curvature 2447 b extending from the top surface of the projection 2443. The first radius of curvature 2447 a is different than the second radius of curvature 2447 b. For instance, the first radius of curvature 2447 a is larger than the second radius of curvature 2447 b; however, the curvatures 2447 a and 2447 b can comprise any suitable configuration. Referring primarily to FIG. 74, the first radius of curvature 2447 a extends upwardly past a centerline 2450 of the projection 2443.
• Turning now to FIGS. 75-77, a firing member 2540 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2542 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2542 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2542 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2542 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2542 also comprises projections 2543 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2543 comprises a drive surface defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2543 further comprises a radiused-transition extending around the perimeter thereof. The coupling member 2542 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2540 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2540 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each projection 2543 comprises a lateral side, or end, 2552 which is flat, or at least substantially flat. Each projection 2543 further comprises a radiused transition 2547 extending around the lateral end 2552. Each projection 2543 is symmetrical, or at least substantially symmetrical, about a longitudinal centerline which extends through the lateral end 2552. Moreover, the top surface and the bottom surface of each projection 2543 are parallel to one another.
• Referring primarily to FIG. 76, the leading end 2551 of each projection 2543 is positioned distally with respect to a cutting edge 2042 of the cutting portion 2041. The trailing end 2559 of each projection 2543 is positioned proximally with respect to the cutting edge 2042. As a result, the projections 2043 longitudinally span the cutting edge 2042. In such instances, the firing member 2540 can hold the anvil and the staple cartridge together directly at the location in which the tissue is being cut.
• Turning now to FIGS. 78-80, a firing member 2640 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2642 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2642 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2642 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2642 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2642 also comprises projections 2643 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2643 comprises a drive surface 2645 defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2643 further comprises a radiused-transition 2649 extending around the perimeter thereof. The coupling member 2642 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2640 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2640 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each projection 2643 further comprises a lateral end 2652, a bottom drive surface 2645, and a top surface 2647. The bottom drive surface 2645 is flat and is parallel to the longitudinal firing path 2660 of the firing member 2640. Referring primarily to FIG. 80, the top surface 2647 is flat, but not parallel to the longitudinal firing path 2660. Moreover, the top surface 2647 is not parallel to the bottom surface 2645. As a result, each projection 2643 is asymmetrical. In fact, the orientation of the top surface 2647 shifts the moment of inertia of the projection 2643 above the lateral end 2652. Such an arrangement can increase the bending stiffness of the projections 2643 which can reduce the deflection of the projections 2643.
• Turning now to FIGS. 81-83, a firing member 2740 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2742 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2742 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2742 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2742 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2742 also comprises projections 2743 configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. Each projection 2743 comprises a drive surface defined on the bottom side thereof. The coupling member 2742 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2740 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2740 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each projection 2743 comprises a first, or leading, portion 2753 a and a second, or lagging, portion 2753 b positioned distally behind the leading portion 2753 a. The leading portion 2753 a comprises a curved lead-in surface 2751 defined on the distal end thereof which is configured to initially engage the anvil. The leading portion 2753 a further comprises a first, or leading, drive surface 2745 a defined on the bottom side thereof. Similarly, the lagging portion 2753 b comprises a second, or lagging, drive surface 2745 b defined on the bottom side thereof. Each projection 2743 further comprises a transition 2752 defined between the leading portion 2753 a and the lagging portion 2753 b.
• As the firing member 2740 is advanced distally, further to the above, the drive surfaces 2745 a and 2745 b can co-operate to engage and position the anvil. In certain embodiments, the drive surfaces 2745 a and 2745 b define a drive plane which is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the longitudinal path 2760 of the firing member 2740 during the staple firing stroke. In some instances, however, only the leading drive surface 2745 a may engage the cam surface defined on the anvil. Such instances can arise when the firing member 2740 progressively closes the anvil, for example.
• In other embodiments, referring to FIGS. 93 and 94, the leading drive surface 2745 a is positioned above the lagging drive surface 2745 b. Stated another way, the leading drive surface 2745 a is positioned further away from the longitudinal path 2760 than the lagging drive surface 2745 b such that both drive surfaces 2745 a and 2745 b remain in contact with the anvil during the staple firing stroke. In at least one instance, the drive surfaces 2745 a and 2745 b can define a drive plane which is transverse to the longitudinal path 2760. In certain instances, a 1 degree angle, for example, can be defined between the drive plane and the longitudinal path 2760. In various instances, the leading drive surface 2745 a is positioned vertically above the lagging drive surface 2745 b by approximately 0.001″, for example. In other embodiments, the leading drive surface 2745 a is positioned vertically above the lagging drive surface 2745 b by approximately 0.002″, for example. In certain instances, the leading drive surface 2745 a is positioned above the lagging drive surface 2745 b a distance which is between about 0.001″ and about 0.002″, for example
• In certain instances, referring again to FIG. 93, only the lagging drive surfaces 2745 b may be in contact with the cam surfaces of the anvil when the firing member 2740 progressively closes the anvil. In such instances, the leading drive surfaces 2745 a are not in contact with the cam surfaces of the anvil. Such an arrangement can reduce the plastic deformation of the projections 2743 and reduce to force needed to advance the firing member 2740 distally as compared to when only the leading drive surfaces 2745 a are in contact with the cam surfaces of the anvil. When the anvil begins to flex owing to the staple forming load being applied to the anvil, in some instances, the anvil can flex upwardly into contact with the leasing drive surfaces 2745 a as illustrated in FIG. 94.
• The leading portion 2753 a is thicker than the lagging portion 2753 b. Stated another way, the leading portion 2753 a has a larger bending moment of inertia than the lagging portion 2753 b which can resist the upward bending of the projection 2743. As a result, the lagging portion 2753 b can deflect upwardly more than the leading portion 2753 a. In such instances, it is more likely that both portions 2753 a and 2753 b of the projections 2743 can remain in contact with the anvil during the staple firing stroke even though the firing member 2740 is being used to progressively close the anvil. Moreover, the leading portion 2753 a also has a larger shear thickness than the lagging portion 2753 b which can better resist shear forces transmitted through the projections 2743. The leading portion 2753 a is often exposed to greater shear forces than the lagging portion 2753 b and, as a result, can benefit from the increased shear thickness. If it is believed that the lagging portion 2753 b may experience greater shear forces than the leading projection 2753 a, then the lagging portion 2753 b can have a greater shear thickness than the leading portion 2753 a, for example.
• Turning now to FIGS. 84-86, a firing member 2840 comprises a firing bar and a coupling member 2842 attached to the firing bar. The coupling member 2842 comprises a connector 2148 which connects the coupling member 2842 to the firing bar. The coupling member 2842 further comprises a cutting member 2041 configured to incise the tissue of a patient during a staple firing stroke. The coupling member 2842 also comprises projections configured to engage an anvil, such as anvil 2030 or 2030′, for example, and, in addition, a foot 2144 configured to engage a staple cartridge jaw during the staple firing stroke. As described in greater detail below, each projection comprises a drive surface defined on the bottom side thereof. The coupling member 2842 further comprises intermediate projections 2146 extending laterally therefrom which are configured to prevent the firing member 2840 from performing the staple firing stroke when an unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in front of the firing member 2840 at the outset of the staple firing stroke.
• Further to the above, each side of the coupling member comprises a first, or leading, projection 2843 d and a second, or lagging, projection 2843 p positioned behind the leading projection 2843 d. The leading projection 2843 d comprises a curved lead-in surface 2851 d defined on the distal end thereof which is configured to initially engage the anvil. The leading projection 2843 d further comprises a first, or leading, drive surface 2845 d defined on the bottom side thereof. Similarly, the lagging projection 2843 p comprises a curved lead-in surface 2851 p defined on the distal end thereof which is configured to engage the anvil. The lagging projection 2843 p further comprises a second, or lagging, drive surface 2845 p defined on the bottom side thereof.
• As the firing member 2840 is advanced distally, further to the above, the drive surfaces 2845 d and 2845 p can co-operate to engage and position the anvil. In certain embodiments, the drive surfaces 2845 d and 2845 p define a drive plane which is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the longitudinal path 2860 of the firing member 2840 during the staple firing stroke. In other embodiments, the leading drive surface 2845 d is positioned above the lagging drive surface 2845 p. Stated another way, the leading drive surface 2845 d is positioned further away from the longitudinal path 2860 than the lagging drive surface 2845 p. In at least one instance, the drive surfaces 2845 d and 2845 p can define a drive plane which is transverse to the longitudinal path 2860. In certain instances, a 1 degree angle, for example, can be defined between the drive plane and the longitudinal path 2860.
• Further to the above, the leading projections 2843 d and the lagging projections 2843 p can move relative to each other. In various instances, a leading projection 2843 d and a lagging projection 2843 p on one side of the coupling member 2842 can move independently of one another. Such an arrangement can allow the projections 2843 d and 2843 p to independently adapt to the orientation of the anvil, especially when the firing member 2840 is used to progressively close the anvil. As a result, both of the projections 2843 d and 2843 p can remain engaged with the anvil such that forces flow between the firing member 2840 and the anvil at several locations and that the plastic deformation of the projections is reduced.
• FIG. 91 depicts the energy required for a first firing member to complete a firing stroke, labeled as 2090′, and a second firing member to complete a firing stroke, labeled as 3090. The firing stroke 2090′ represents a condition in which significant plastic deformation and galling is occurring. The firing stroke 3090 represents an improvement over the firing stroke 2090′ in which the deformation of the firing member and anvil ledge is mostly elastic. It is believed that, in certain instances, the plastic strain experienced by the firing member and/or anvil can be reduced by about 40%-60%, for example, by employing the teachings disclosed herein.
• The various embodiments described herein can be utilized to balance the loads transmitted between a firing member and an anvil. Such embodiments can also be utilized to balance the loads transmitted between a firing member and a staple cartridge jaw. In either event, the firing member can be designed to provide a desired result but it should be understood that such a desired result may not be achieved in some circumstances owing to manufacturing tolerances of the stapling instrument and/or the variability of the tissue thickness captured within the end effector, for example. In at least one instance, the upper projections and/or the bottom foot of the firing member, for example, can comprise wearable features which are configured to allow the firing member to define a balanced interface with the anvil.
• Further to the above, referring now to FIGS. 87-90, a firing member 2940 comprises lateral projections 2943. Each projection 2943 comprises longitudinal ridges 2945 extending from the bottom thereof. The ridges 2945 are configured to plastically deform and/or smear when the firing member 2940 is advanced distally to engage the anvil. The ridges 2945 are configured to quickly wear in, or take a set, so as to increase the contact area between the projections 2943 and the anvil and provide better load balancing between the firing member 2940 and the anvil. Such an arrangement can be especially useful when the end effector is used to perform several staple firing strokes. In addition to or in lieu of the above, one or more wearable pads can be attached to the projections of the firing member which can be configured to plastically deform.
• Traditionally, surgical stapling and cutting instruments comprised robust mechanical lockouts configured to protect against unauthorized firing of the surgical stapling and cutting instruments because of the dangers associated with such unauthorized firing. For example, firing a surgical stapling and cutting instrument that is not loaded with a staple cartridge, or is loaded with a staple cartridge that has already been fired, may cause severe bleeding if the tissue cutting is performed without any tissue stapling.
• The recent transition to motorized surgical stapling and cutting instruments presents new challenges in ensuring the safe operation of such instruments. Among other things, the present disclosure presents various electrical and electro-mechanical lockouts that are suitable for use with motorized surgical stapling and cutting instruments. Since lockout failure can result in a serious risk to the patient, the present disclosure presents multiple safeguards that operate in redundancy to ensure that lockout failures are avoided. The present disclosure provides various techniques for detecting when a staple cartridge is attached to an end effector of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument. The present disclosure further provides various techniques for detecting whether an attached staple cartridge is spent.
• An end effector 4000 of a surgical stapling system is illustrated in FIG. 95. The end effector 4000 comprises a frame 4002, a cartridge jaw 4004, and an anvil 4006. The cartridge jaw 4004 extends fixedly from the frame 4002. The anvil 4006 is movable between an open, or unclamped, position and a closed, or clamped, position (FIG. 95) relative to the cartridge jaw 4004. In alternative embodiments, the cartridge jaw 4004 is movable between an open, or unclamped, position and a closed, or clamped, position relative to the anvil 4006. In at least one such embodiment, the anvil 4006 extends fixedly from the frame 4002.
• The cartridge jaw 4004 includes a channel or carrier 4022 configured to receive a staple cartridge, such as a staple cartridge 4008, for example. Referring to FIG. 96, the staple cartridge 4008 comprises a cartridge body 4010. The cartridge body 4010 comprises a deck 4012 configured to support the tissue of a patient, a longitudinal slot 4014, and six longitudinal rows of staple cavities 4016 defined therein. Each staple cavity 4016 is configured to receive and removably store a staple therein. The staple cartridge 4008 further comprises staple drivers configured to drive the staples out of the staple cavities 4016. Other staple cartridges with various other arrangements of staple cavities, decks, and/or staples are envisioned for use with the end effector 4000.
• Further to the above, the staple cartridge 4008 further comprises a sled 4018 configured to engage the staple drivers. More specifically, the sled 4018 comprises ramps 4020 configured to engage cams defined on the staple drivers and lift the staple drivers and the staples within the staple cavities 4016 as the sled 4018 is moved distally through the staple cartridge 4008. A firing member is configured to motivate the sled 4018 distally from a proximal, unfired, or starting position toward a distal, fired, or end position during a staple firing stroke.
• Referring to FIGS. 96, 97, 98B, the staple cartridge 4008 includes a cartridge circuit 4024. The cartridge circuit 4024 includes a storage medium 4026, a cartridge connector-region 4017 comprising a plurality of external electrical contacts 4028, and a cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 that includes a trace element 4034. The storage medium 4026 can be a memory that stores information about the staple cartridge 4008 such as, for example, various characteristics of the staple cartridge 4008 including a firing status, staple-type, staple-size, cartridge batch number, and/or cartridge color.
• Referring to FIGS. 99-100, the sled 4018 further includes a circuit breaker 4019 comprising a gripping member 4021 that is configured to capture and sever the trace element 4034 from the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 as the sled 4018 is advanced distally from a starting position. By severing the trace element 4034, the circuit breaker 4019 transitions the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 from a closed configuration to an open configuration which signals a transition of the staple cartridge 4000 from an unfired, or unspent, status to a fired, or spent, status. Information about this transition can be stored in the storage medium 4026. Accordingly, sensing that a staple cartridge 4008 has a severed trace element 4034 can indicate that the staple cartridge 4008 has already been fired.
• As illustrated in FIGS. 99-100, the gripping member 4021 of the circuit breaker 4019 has a right-angle configuration with a first portion 4023 protruding or extending away from a bottom surface 4025 of the sled 4018 and a second portion 4027 defining a right angle with the first portion 4023. The second portion 4027 is spaced apart from the bottom surface 4025 a sufficient distance to snuggly hold a severed trace element 4034, as illustrated in FIG. 100. This arrangements ensures that the severed trace element 4034 is not accidently lost in a patient's body after completion of the firing steps of an end effector 4000. In at least one instance, the circuit breaker 4019 may comprise a magnetic member configured to magnetically retain a severed trace element 4034, for example. In various instances, a trace element can be cut or displaced to sever or establish an electrical connection indicative of whether a staple cartridge has been fired without completely severing the trace element.
• In at least one instance, a carrier 4022 may include a Hall effect sensor 4029 (FIG. 100A) configured to detect the presence of a magnet embedded into or attached to a sled 4018. While the sled 4018 is at a start, proximal, or unfired position, the Hall effect sensor 4029 is able to detect the presence of the magnet. But, once the sled 4018 is advanced distally toward an end, distal, or fired position, the Hall effect sensor 4029 no longer senses the presence of the magnet. In at least one instance, a controller 4050 can be configured to receive input from the Hall effect sensor 4029 to assess the position of the sled 4018 and, accordingly, determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on the readings of the Hall effect sensor 4029. In certain instances, the Hall effect sensor 4029 can be attached to the sled 4018 while the corresponding magnet is attached to and/or embedded into the carrier 4022. In certain instances, other position sensors can be employed to determine whether the sled 4018 is at the start, proximal, or unfired position.
• In certain instances, a Hall effect sensor and magnet combination can be employed to determine whether a staple cartridge is spent by detecting whether a staple driver is at a start or unfired position. As described above, during a firing stroke, a sled 4018 is transitioned from a start, proximal, or unfired position toward an end, distal, or fired position to motivate a plurality of staple drivers to deploy staples of a staple cartridge. Each staple driver is generally lifted from a start or unfired position toward an final or fired position to deploy one or more staples. The Hall effect sensor can be coupled to the carrier 4022 or the staple cartridge 4008. The corresponding magnet can be coupled to a staple driver such as, for example, a proximal staple driver of the staple cartridge 4008. In at least one instance, the corresponding magnet is coupled to a proximal-most staple driver of the staple cartridge 4008. In certain instances, the Hall effect sensor is coupled to the carrier 4022 or the staple cartridge 4008 while the magnet is coupled to the staple driver. In certain instances, the Hall effect sensor is coupled to the carrier 4022 or the staple cartridge 4008 while the magnet is coupled to the proximal-most staple driver.
• The Hall effect sensor is configured to detect the presence of the magnet while the staple driver is in the start or unfired position. But once the sled 4018 motivates the staple driver to be lifted from the start or unfired position, the Hall effect sensor no longer senses the presence of the magnet. Alternatively, the Hall effect sensor and magnet arrangement can be configured to detect when the staple driver reaches the final or fired position, for example. The Hall effect sensor and magnet arrangement can be configured to detect when the distal-most staple driver reaches the final or fired position, for example. In any event, a controller 4050 can be configured to receive input from the Hall effect sensor to assess the position of the staple driver and, accordingly, determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on the readings of the Hall effect sensor 4029. In certain instances, other position sensors can be employed to determine whether the staple driver is at the start or unfired position.
• As illustrated in FIG. 100A, the controller 4050 may comprise a processor 4052 and/or one or more storage mediums such as, for example, a memory 4054. By executing instruction code stored in the memory 4054, the processor 4052 may control various components of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument such as a firing system 4056 and a user interface 4058 such as, for example, a display. The memory 4054 includes program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on input from one or more sensors such as, for example, the Hall effect sensor 4029.
• The user interface 4058 may include one or more visual feedback elements including display screens, backlights, and/or LEDs, for example. In certain instances, the user interface 4058 may comprise one or more audio feedback systems such as speakers and/or buzzers, for example. In certain instances, the user interface 4058 may comprise one or more haptic feedback systems, for example. In certain instances, the user interface 4058 may comprise combinations of visual, audio, and/or haptic feedback systems, for example.
• In at least one instance, the carrier 4022 includes one or more electrical contacts configured to be electrically connected to corresponding electrical contacts in a sled 4018 of a staple cartridge 4008 seated in the carrier 4022. The electrical contacts define an electrical circuit 4031 (FIG. 100B) that remains closed while the sled 4018 is in a proximal unfired position. The electrical circuit 4031 is transitioned into an open configuration when the sled 4018 is advanced toward an end, distal, or fired position due to the severance of the electrical connection between the electrical contacts of the carrier 4022 and the sled 4018.
• The electrical circuit 4031 may further include one or more sensors such as, for example, voltage or current sensors configured to detect whether the electrical circuit 4031 is in a closed configuration or an open configuration. Input from the one or more sensors can be received by a controller 4050. The controller 4050 can determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on the input from the one or more sensors. The memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on input from the one or more sensors.
• In certain instances, a staple cartridge 4008 may include an ETS lockout with a continuity path along a path of a sled defined by sled guide rails, for example. When the sled is in a proximal-most position, the sled is configured to interrupt the electrical path. However, when the sled is advanced distally the electrical path is completed and is sensed by an inductance sensor in the carrier 4022, for example. In various instances, one or more inductance sensors can be configured to track one or more proximal forming pockets for identification of the finger print of staples received within the proximal pockets. The inductance sensors can be configured to detect the absence of the staples from their respective forming pockets. Examples of ETS lockouts are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0248577, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING DEVICE WITH LOCKOUT SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING ACTUATION IN THE ABSENCE OF AN INSTALLED STAPLE CARTRIDGE, filed Mar. 26, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,078,653, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein.
• In at least one instance, a staple cartridge, similar to the staple cartridge 4008, includes at least one electrical circuit 4033 (FIG. 100C) that comprises two electrical contacts that are spaced apart from one another. The electrical contacts are configured to be bridged by a staple of the staple cartridge when the staple is in an unfired position. Accordingly, the electrical circuit 4033 is in a closed configuration when the staple is in the unfired position. In addition, the electrical circuit 4033 is in an open configuration when the staple is lifted by a staple driver for deployment into tissue. The lifting of the staple by a staple driver during a firing stroke separates the staple from the electrical contacts of the electrical circuit 4033 thereby transitioning the electrical circuit 4033 into an open configuration.
• The electrical circuit 4033 may further include one or more sensors such as, for example, voltage or current sensors configured to detect whether the electrical circuit 4033 is in a closed configuration or an open configuration. Input from the one or more sensors can be received by a controller 4050. The controller 4050 can determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on the input from the one or more sensors. The memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on input from the one or more sensors.
• In at least one instance, a staple cartridge, similar to the staple cartridge 4008, includes at least one electrical circuit 4035 (FIG. 100D) that comprises a conductive bridge that is configured to be ruptured when a staple driver of the staple cartridge is lifted to deploy one or more staples into tissue, which causes the electrical circuit 4035 to be transitioned from a closed configuration to an open configuration. The lifting of the staple driver during a firing stroke causes the conductive bridge of the electrical circuit 4035 to be severed, cut, or displaced thereby transitioning the electrical circuit 4033 into an open configuration. The conductive bridge of the electrical circuit 4035 is placed in a predetermined path of the staple driver. In at least one instance, the conductive bridge extends across, or at least partially across, a staple pocket configured to store the staple in an unfired position.
• The electrical circuit 4035 may further include one or more sensors such as, for example, voltage or current sensors configured to detect whether the electrical circuit 4035 is in a closed configuration or an open configuration. Input from the one or more sensors can be received by a controller 4050. The controller 4050 can determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on the input from the one or more sensors. The memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine whether an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent based on input from the one or more sensors.
• In various instances, upon determining that an attached staple cartridge 4008 is spent, a controller 4050 is configured to cause the firing system 4056 to be deactivated and/or provide user feedback as to the reason for the deactivation through a user interface such as, for example, a display 4058. The controller 4050 may identify and/or aid a user in addressing the cause of the deactivation of the firing system 4056. For example, the controller 4050 may alert a user that an attached staple cartridge is spent or is not the correct type to be used with the end effector 4000. Other techniques for determining whether a staple cartridge is spent are included in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/131,963, entitled METHOD FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed Apr. 18, 2016, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
• As illustrated in FIG. 98A, the carrier 4022 includes a carrier circuit 4043 (FIG. 98C) separably couplable to a cartridge circuit 4024 of a staple cartridge 4008. The carrier circuit 4043 has a plurality of electrical contacts 4036. In addition, the carrier circuit 4043 includes a carrier connector-region 4013 comprising a plurality of connectors 4038 that each defines a first electrical contact 4038 a and a second electrical contact 4038 b. The connectors 4038 are positioned such that a gap is maintained between the electrical contacts 4036 and the first electrical contacts 4038 a of the connectors 4038 in their neutral positions. Each of the connectors 4038 comprises a curved portion protruding from a supporting wall 4040. The second electrical contacts 4038 b are defined at the curved portions of the connectors 4038. When the staple cartridge 4008 is inserted in the carrier 4022, the external electrical contacts 4028 of the staple cartridge 4008 are configured to engage and move the connectors 4038 into a biased configuration where the electrical contacts 4036 are electrically coupled to the corresponding first electrical contacts 4038 a of the connectors 4038. While the staple cartridge 4008 is seated in the carrier 4022, the external electrical contacts 4028 of the staple cartridge 4008 are also electrically coupled to the corresponding second electrical contacts 4038 b of the connectors 4038.
• To ensure a robust electrical connection, one or more of the electrical connectors 4038, external electrical contacts 4028, the electrical contacts 4036, the electrical contacts 4038 a, and/or the electrical contacts 4038 b can be coated, or at least partially coated, with a fluid-repellant coating, and/or potted in an insulating material such as silicon to prevent fluid ingress. As illustrated in FIG. 98A, a fluid-repellant coating is added to the electrical connectors 4038 and the electrical contacts 4036. In at least one aspect, the fluid-repellant coating is added to all the electrical cables and/or connections of a staple cartridge. One or more fluid-repellant coatings manufactured by Aculon, Inc., for example, can be used.
• Further to the above, the electrical contacts 4038 b of the spring-biased electrical connectors 4038 include wearing features, or point contacts, 4039 in the form of a raised dome-shaped structure configured to remove or scratch off the fluid-repellant coating from the external electrical contacts 4028 of the staple cartridge 4008 thus establishing an electrical connection with the staple cartridge 4008. A compressible seal 4041 is configured to prevent, or at least resist, fluid ingress between a carrier 4022 and a staple cartridge 4008 seated in the carrier 4022. The compressible seal 4041 can be comprised of a compressible material that snuggly fits between a carrier 4022 and a staple cartridge 4008 seated in the carrier 4022. As illustrated in FIG. 98A, the compressible seal 4041 defines walls that define a perimeter around, or at least partially around, the electrical connectors 4038 and the external electrical contacts 4028 of the staple cartridge 4008 when the staple cartridge 4008 is seated in the carrier 4022.
• Referring primarily to FIGS. 96-98, the carrier connector-region 4013 and the cartridge connector-region 4017 are configured to facilitate an electrical connection between the cartridge circuit 4024 and the carrier circuit 4043 when the staple cartridge 4008 is seated within the carrier 4022. As illustrated in FIG. 98, the carrier connector-region 4013 is located on a side wall 4009 of the carrier 4022. The carrier connector-region 4013 is secured to an inner surface 4011 of the side wall 4009. As illustrated in FIG. 97, the cartridge connector-region 4017 is located on a side wall 4007 of the staple cartridge 4008. The cartridge connector-region 4017 is secured to an outer surface 4005 of the side wall 4007. The carrier connector-region 4013 is configured to abut against the cartridge connector-region 4017 when the staple cartridge 4008 is seated in the carrier 4022. The compressible seal 4041 prevents, or at least resists, fluid ingress between the carrier connector-region 4013 and the cartridge connector-region 4017. Positioning the carrier connector-region 4013 and the cartridge connector-region 4017 on the corresponding side walls 4009 and 4007 facilitates the establishment of an electrical connection between the staple cartridge 4008 and the end effector 4000 by seating the staple cartridge 4008 within the carrier 4022. Positioning the carrier connector-region 4013 and the cartridge connector-region 4017 on the corresponding side walls 4009 and 4007 permits establishing a connection between the carrier connector-region 4013 and the cartridge connector-region 4017 simply by seating the staple cartridge 4008 in the carrier 4022.
• As illustrated in FIG. 101, a first electrical interface 4042 is defined by the electrical contacts 4036 and 4038 a. The first electrical interface 4042 is configured to be transitioned between an open configuration where the electrical contacts 4036 and 4038 a are spaced apart and a closed configuration where the electrical contacts 4036 and 4038 a are electrically coupled. Likewise, a second electrical interface 4044 is defined by the electrical contacts 4038 b and 4028. The second electrical interface 4044 is configured to be transitioned between an open configuration where the electrical contacts 4038 b and 4028 are spaced apart and a closed configuration where the electrical contacts 4038 b and 4028 are electrically coupled. Furthermore, a third electrical interface 4046 is defined between the end effector 4000 and a handle portion of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument. The third electrical interface 4046 is also configured to be transitioned between an open configuration where the end effector 4000 is not attached to the handle portion and a closed configuration where the end effector 4000 is attached to the handle portion.
• The transition of the electrical interface 4042 from an open configuration to a closed configuration indicates that a staple cartridge has been attached to the carrier 4022. In addition, the transition of the electrical interface 4044 from an open configuration to a closed configuration indicates that a correct type of staple cartridge has been attached to the carrier 4022. When the electrical interface 4044 is in the closed configuration, the storage medium 4026 of the staple cartridge 4008 can be accessed to obtain information stored therein about staple cartridge 4008.
• In certain instances, as illustrated in FIG. 101, the electrical interfaces 4042, 4044, and 4046 and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 are electrically connected in a control circuit 4048. In such instances, a safety mechanism can be incorporated to prevent the firing of the end effector 4000 if at least one of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 is in an open configuration. Said another way, if the control circuit 4048 is in an open configuration, the safety mechanism prevents the firing of the end effector 4000. In other words, if the end effector 4000 is not correctly attached to the handle portion of the surgical instrument, if no staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022, if an incorrect staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022, and/or if a spent staple cartridge is attached to carrier 4022, the safety mechanism prevents the firing of the end effector 4000.
• In certain instances, one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 are connected in parallel with non-severable sections of the control circuit 4048 which helps avoid any single point failure due to a full interruption of the control circuit 4048. This arrangement ensures a continued electrical connection within the control circuit 4048 in the event one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 is in an open configuration. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 101, the trace element 4034 of the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 is in parallel with a first resistive element 4037 and in series with a second resistive element 4037′ to ensure continued operation and avoid a single point failure of the control circuit 4048 in the event the trace element 4034 is severed. One or more sensors, including but not limited to voltage and/or current sensors, can be employed to detect a current configuration and/or a transition between an open or severed configuration and a closed or intact configuration.
• In certain instances, one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 are not connected in series. In such instances, one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and/or the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 are configured to separately provide feedback regarding their dedicated functions.
• Referring to FIGS. 101-103, one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 can be implemented in the form of a conductive gate 4060 transitionable between an open configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 102, and a closed configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 103. In the closed configuration, the conductive gate 4060 enables an electrical connection between two end-points of an electrical circuit such as, for example, the control circuit 4048. The electrical connection, however, is severed when the conductive gate 4060 is transitioned to the open configuration.
• The conductive gate 4060 can be repeatedly transitioned between a closed configuration and an open configuration. The conductive gate 4060 includes a pivot portion 4062 rotatably attached to a first end-point 4068 of the control circuit 4048. The conductive gate 4060 is configured to pivot about the first end-point 4068 between the open and closed configurations. The conductive gate 4060 further includes an attachment portion 4066 spaced apart from the pivot portion 4062. A central bridge portion 4064 extends between and connects the pivot portion 4062 and the attachment portion 4066. As illustrated in FIGS. 102-103, the attachment portion 4066 is in the form of a hook or latch configured to releasably capture a second end-point 4069 of the control circuit 4048 to transition the conductive gate 4060 from the open configuration to the closed configuration. In certain instances, the attachment portion 4066 may comprise a magnetic attachment or any other mechanical attachment, for example. In at least one instance, the conductive gate 4060 can be spring-biased in the closed configuration. Alternatively, the conductive gate 4060 can be spring-biased in the open configuration.
• As illustrated in FIG. 103A, a safety mechanism 4047 of the surgical instrument may include a controller 4050 which may comprise a processor 4052 and/or one or more storage mediums such as, for example, a memory 4054. By executing instruction code stored in the memory 4054, the processor 4052 may control various components of the surgical instrument such as a firing system 4056 and a user interface such as, for example, a display 4058. The controller 4050 keeps track of the statuses of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and/or the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032. As described in greater detail below, the controller 4050 may, depending on the reported statuses of one or more of the electrical interface 4042, the electrical interface 4044, the electrical interface 4046, and/or the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032, cause the firing system 4056 to be deactivated and/or provide user feedback as to the reason for the deactivation. In certain instances, the controller 4050 may identify and/or aid a user in addressing the cause of the deactivation of the firing system 4056. For example, the controller 4050 may alert a user that an attached staple cartridge is spent or is not the correct type to be used with the end effector 4000.
• In various instances, the memory 4054 includes program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that a staple cartridge 4008 has been attached to the carrier 4022 when a transition of the electrical interface 4042 to a closed configuration is detected by the processor 4052. In addition, the memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that that attached staple cartridge 4008 has already been spent or fired when a transition of the electrical interface 4042 to a closed configuration is detected by the processor 4052 but the cartridge-status circuit portion 4032 is in the open configuration.
• Further to the above, the memory 4054 may also include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that a memory 4026 of an attached staple cartridge 4008 is accessible when a transition of the electrical interface 4044 to a closed configuration is detected by the processor 4052. In addition, the processor 4052 may be configured to retrieve certain information stored in the memory 4026 of the attached staple cartridge 4008. In certain instances, detecting a closed configuration of the electrical interface 4042 while not detecting a closed configuration of the electrical interface 4044 indicates that an incorrect staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022.
• Further to the above, the memory 4054 may also include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that a successful connection between the end effector 4000 and the handle portion of the surgical instrument has been detected when a transition of the electrical interface 4046 to a closed configuration is detected by the processor 4052.
• Referring to FIG. 103B, a block diagram depicts a method 4071 of firing a surgical instrument that includes an end effector such as, for example, the end effector 4000. In a first step 4073, a firing trigger 4550 (FIG. 118) is pressed while a cutting member of the end effector 4000 is positioned proximally to a predetermined no-cartridge-lockout zone. One or more position sensors can be employed to determine the position of the cutting member. The firing trigger can be located on a handle of the surgical instrument and can be pressed by a user, for example, to in initiate a firing stroke of the surgical instrument. Next, a first decision block 4075 is configured to check whether the trace element 4034 (FIG. 99) is intact, and a second decision block 4077 is configured to check whether the memory 4026 (FIG. 97) can be read. If the trace element 4034 is not intact or the memory 4026 cannot be read, the firing lockout is engaged, as indicated in step 4079. Then, once captured tissue is released by unclamping the end effector 4000 at step 4070, an articulation mode is re-engaged in step 4072. If, however, the trace element 4034 is intact and the memory 4026 is read, the firing system 4056 is permitted to proceed through the firing stroke, step 4074. A decision block 4076 is configured to provide a threshold at a pre-determined cutline at which point, the firing system 4056 is reset. Resetting the firing system 4056 can include returning the cutting member to a per-determined default position, as depicted in step 4078. As illustrated in step 4074 a, if the firing trigger 4550 is pressed while the cutting member of the end effector 4000 is positioned distal to the predetermined no-cartridge-lockout zone, the firing system 4056 is permitted to proceed with the firing stroke.
• Referring to FIGS. 104-108, a staple cartridge 4100 is similar in many respects to the staple cartridge 4008. The staple cartridge 4100 is releasably attached to the end effector 4000. In addition, the staple cartridge 4100 includes a cartridge-status circuit 4102 for assessing whether the staple cartridge 4100 is attached to an end effector 4000 and/or whether an attached staple cartridge 4100 was previously fired.
• As illustrated in FIG. 104, the staple cartridge 4100 comprises a conductive gate 4160 at a proximal portion 4103 of the staple cartridge 4100. The conductive gate 4160 is movable between a first closed configuration (FIG. 106), a second closed configuration (FIG. 108), and an open configuration (FIG. 107). A controller can be configured to assess whether the staple cartridge 4100 is attached to an end effector 4000 and/or whether an attached staple cartridge 4100 was previously fired by determining whether the conductive gate 4160 is at an open configuration, a first closed configuration, or a second closed configuration. In at least one instance, the first closed configuration is a partially closed configuration while the second closed configuration is a fully closed configuration.
• In a closed configuration, the conductive gate 4160 extends across an elongate slot 4114 defined between a first deck portion 4112 a and a second deck portion 4112 b of the staple cartridge 4100. The conductive gate 4160 extends between a first end-point 4168 of the cartridge-status circuit 4102 and a second end-point 4170 of the cartridge-status circuit 4102. The first end-point 4168 is defined on a first side wall 4114 a of the elongate slot 4114 and the second end-point 4170 is defined on a second side wall 4114 b of the elongate slot 4114. To connect the first end-point 4168 and the second end-point 4170 in the closed configuration, the conductive gate 4160 bridges the elongate slot 4114, as illustrated in FIG. 106.
• As illustrated in FIG. 104, the conductive gate 4160 includes a pivot portion 4162 rotatably attached to the first end-point 4168 of the cartridge-status circuit 4102. The conductive gate 4160 is configured to pivot about the first end-point 4168 between the open, first closed, and second closed configurations. The conductive gate 4160 further includes an attachment portion 4166 spaced apart from the pivot portion 4162. A central bridge portion 4164 extends between and connects the pivot portion 4162 and the attachment portion 4166. As illustrated in FIG. 104, the attachment portion 4166 is in the form of a hook or latch configured to be releasably captured by the second end-point 4170. The attachment portion 4166 includes a “C” shaped ring 4171 configured to receive the second end-point 4170 in the second closed configuration. An opening 4173 of the “C” shaped ring 4171 is slightly smaller than the second end-point 4170. Accordingly, for the second end-point 4170 to be received within the “C” shaped ring 4171 an external force is needed to pass the second end-point 4170 through the opening 4173 of the “C” shaped ring 4171 and bring the conductive gate 4160 to the second closed configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 106.
• Although the conductive gate is spring-biased toward a closed configuration, the spring-biasing force is insufficient to bring the conductive gate 4160 to the second closed configuration. Accordingly, in the absence of an external force to motivate the conductive gate 4160 toward an open configuration or a second closed configuration, the conductive gate 4160 will swing, under the effect of the spring-biasing force, to a resting position at the first closed configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 108. At the first closed configuration, an intermediate region 4175 between the “C” shaped ring 4171 of the attachment portion 4166 and the central bridge portion 4164 is in contact with the second end-point 4170. However, the second end-point 4170 is not received within the “C” shaped ring 4171.
• The staple cartridge 4100 further comprises a sled 4118 which is similar in many respects to the sled 4018. A firing member 4113 is configured to motivate the sled 4118 distally from a proximal, unfired, or start position toward a distal, fired, or end position during a staple firing stroke. In addition, the sled 4118 includes a catch member 4119 configured to engage and transition the conductive gate 4160 from a second closed configuration to an open configuration as the sled 4118 is advanced distally from the proximal, unfired, or start position toward a distal, fired, or end position. Upon losing contact with the catch member 4119, the conductive gate 4160 is configured to return to the first closed configuration from the open configuration under the influence of the spring-biasing force and in the absence of any external force.
• Referring to FIG. 105, the catch member 4119 extends proximally from the sled 4118 and includes a proximal-extending portion 4119 a and an engagement portion 4119 b protruding from a proximal end of the proximal-extending portion 4119 a. The engagement portion 4119 b is arranged such that conductive gate 4160 is captured by the engagement portion 4119 b as the sled 4118 is advanced from the proximal, unfired, or start position toward the distal, fired, or end position to deploy staples during a firing stroke of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument.
• At least a portion of the catch member 4119 may be constructed from a non-conductive material. In at least one example, the engagement portion 4119 b is at least partially made from a non-conductive material.
• Other arrangements and configurations of the catch member 4119 are contemplated by the present disclosure. In at least one aspect, the catch member 4119 can be a post extending away from a base 4118 a of the sled 4118, for example. In another instances, the catch member 4119 can be in the form of a ramp wherein the conductive gate 4160 is configured to engage a lower portion of the ramp and, as the sled 4118 is advanced distally, the ramp transitions the conductive gate 4160 to an open configuration. Once the conductive gate 4160 reaches the top of the ramp, the spring-biasing force returns the conductive gate 4160 to a first closed position.
• Referring to FIGS. 106-109, the first closed configuration, the second closed configuration, and the open configuration represent a first resistance-status, a second resistance-status, and an infinite resistance-status, respectively, wherein the first resistance-status is different than the second resistance-status and the infinite resistance-status, and wherein the second resistance-status is different than the first resistance-status and the infinite resistance-status. By sensing which of the three statuses is current and/or by sensing transitions between the statuses, a controller 4050 (FIG. 109) can determine whether the staple cartridge 4100 is attached to an end effector 4000 and/or whether an attached staple cartridge 4100 was previously fired.
• The conductive gate 4160 can be configured to define a first resistance when the conductive gate 4160 is at the first closed configuration and a second resistance, different than the first resistance, when the conductive gate 4160 is at the second closed configuration. The controller 4050 may comprise a processor 4052 and/or one or more storage mediums such as, for example, a memory 4054. By executing instruction code stored in the memory 4054, the processor 4052 may identify a current resistance-status of the conductive gate 4160. The controller 4050 may, depending on the detected resistance-status, perform one or more function such as, for example, causing the firing system 4056 to become inactivated and/or providing user feedback as to the reason for such deactivation.
• In various instances, the memory 4054 includes program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that an unspent or unfired staple cartridge 4100 is attached to the carrier 4022 when a second resistance-status is detected by the processor 4052. In addition, the memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that a spent or previously fired staple cartridge 4100 is attached to the carrier 4022 when a first resistance-status is detected by the processor 4052. The memory 4054 may include program instructions which, when executed by the processor 4052, cause the processor 4052 to determine that no staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022 when an infinite resistance-status is detected by the processor 4052.
• The controller 4050 can be configured to make a determination as to whether a staple cartridge 4008 is detected upon activation or powering of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument by performing a first reading, or a plurality of readings, of the resistance-status. If an infinite resistance-status is detected, the controller 4050 may then instruct a user through the display 4058, for example, to load or insert a staple cartridge 4008 into the carrier 4022. If the controller 4050 detects that a staple cartridge 4008 has been attached, the controller 4050 may determine whether the attached staple cartridge has been previously fired by performing a second reading, or a plurality of readings, of the resistance-status. If a first resistance-status is detected, the controller 4050 may instruct the user that the attached staple cartridge 4008 has been previously fired and/or to replace the staple cartridge 4008.
• The controller 4050 employs a resistance-status detector 4124 to detect a current resistance-status and, in turn, determine whether the conductive gate 4160 is in the open configuration, the first closed configuration, or the second closed configuration. In at least one aspect, the resistance-status detector 4124 may comprise a current sensor. For example, the controller 4050 may cause a predetermined voltage potential to be generated between the first end-point 4168 and the second end-point 4170, and then measure the current passing through the conductive gate 4160. If the measured current corresponds to the first resistance, the controller 4050 determines that the conductive gate 4160 is at the first closed configuration. On the other hand, if the measured current corresponds to the second resistance, the controller determines that the conductive gate 4160 is at the second closed configuration. Finally, if no current is detected, the controller 4050 determines that the conductive gate 4160 is at the open configuration. In at least one aspect, the resistance-status detector 4124 may comprise other sensors such as, for example, a voltage sensor.
• In various instances, one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller 4050 may be implemented using integrated and/or discrete hardware elements, software elements, and/or a combination of both. Examples of integrated hardware elements may include processors, microprocessors, controllers, integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor devices, chips, microchips, chip sets, microcontroller, system-on-chip (SoC), and/or system-in-package (SIP). Examples of discrete hardware elements may include circuits and/or circuit elements (e.g., logic gates, field effect transistors, bipolar transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, relay and so forth). In other embodiments, one or more controllers of the present disclosure may include a hybrid circuit comprising discrete and integrated circuit elements or components on one or more substrates, for example.
• In one embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 110, a circuit 4080 may comprise a controller comprising one or more processors 4082 (e.g., microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to at least one memory circuit 4084. The at least one memory circuit 4084 stores machine executable instructions that when executed by the processor 4082, cause the processor 4082 to execute machine instructions to implement one or more of the functions performed by one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller 4050.
• The processor 4082 may be any one of a number of single or multi-core processors known in the art. The memory circuit 4084 may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media. In one embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 110, the processor 4082 may include an instruction processing unit 4086 and an arithmetic unit 4088. The instruction processing unit may be configured to receive instructions from the one memory circuit 4084.
• In one embodiment, a circuit 4090 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a combinational logic circuit 4092, as illustrated in FIG. 111, configured to implement one or more of the functions performed by one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller 4050. In one embodiment, a circuit 4200 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a sequential logic circuit, as illustrated in FIG. 112. The sequential logic circuit 4200 may comprise the combinational logic circuit 4202 and at least one memory circuit 4204, for example. The at least one memory circuit 4204 can store a current state of the finite state machine, as illustrated in FIG. 112. The sequential logic circuit 4200 or the combinational logic circuit 4202 can be configured to implement one or more of the functions performed by one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller 4050. In certain instances, the sequential logic circuit 4200 may be synchronous or asynchronous.
• In other embodiments, the circuit may comprise a combination of the processor 4082 and the finite state machine to implement one or more of the functions performed by one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller 4050. In other embodiments, the finite state machine may comprise a combination of the combinational logic circuit 4090 and the sequential logic circuit 4200.
• In some cases, various embodiments may be implemented as an article of manufacture. The article of manufacture may include a computer readable storage medium arranged to store logic, instructions and/or data for performing various operations of one or more embodiments. In various embodiments, for example, the article of manufacture may comprise a magnetic disk, optical disk, flash memory or firmware containing computer program instructions suitable for execution by a general purpose processor or application specific processor. The embodiments, however, are not limited in this context.
• The functions of the various functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein may be implemented in the general context of computer executable instructions, such as software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules executed by the processing unit. Generally, software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules comprise any software element arranged to perform particular operations. Software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules can comprise routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types. An implementation of the software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules and techniques may be stored on and/or transmitted across some form of computer-readable media. In this regard, computer-readable media can be any available medium or media useable to store information and accessible by a computing device. Some embodiments also may be practiced in distributed computing environments where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
• Additionally, it is to be appreciated that the embodiments described herein illustrate example implementations, and that the functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements may be implemented in various other ways which are consistent with the described embodiments. Furthermore, the operations performed by such functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements may be combined and/or separated for a given implementation and may be performed by a greater number or fewer number of components or modules. As will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reading the present disclosure, each of the individual embodiments described and illustrated herein has discrete components and features which may be readily separated from or combined with the features of any of the other several aspects without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Any recited method can be carried out in the order of events recited or in any other order which is logically possible
• The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, it will be understood by those within the art that each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof. In one embodiment, several portions of the subject matter described herein may be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), digital signal processors (DSPs), or other integrated formats. Those skilled in the art will recognize, however, that some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and/or writing the code for the software and or firmware would be well within the skill of one of skill in the art in light of this disclosure. In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subject matter described herein are capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subject matter described herein applies regardless of the particular type of signal bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of a signal bearing medium include, but are not limited to, the following: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk drive, a Compact Disc (CD), a Digital Video Disk (DVD), a digital tape, a computer memory, etc.; and a transmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analog communication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wired communications link, a wireless communication link (e.g., transmitter, receiver, transmission logic, reception logic, etc.), etc.).
• Various mechanisms are described herein for detecting attachment of a staple cartridge to a surgical stapling and cutting instrument. In addition, various mechanisms are described herein for determining whether an attached staple cartridge is spent. Since firing a surgical stapling and cutting instrument in the absence of an unspent and properly attached staple cartridge presents a significant danger to the patient, an electromagnetic lockout mechanism 4300 is employed in connection with a firing system such as, for example, the firing system 4056 to prevent firing the surgical stapling and cutting instrument if a staple cartridge is not attached to a carrier 4022 of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument, or if an attached staple cartridge is spent.
• Referring to FIGS. 113-116, a lockout mechanism 4300 for a surgical stapling and cutting instrument interacts with a drive train 4302 of the firing system 4056. The lockout mechanism 4300 comprises an electro-mechanical lockout that includes a latch 4304 transitionable between a locked configuration with a drive train 4302 and an unlocked configuration with the drive train 4302. In the unlocked configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 115, the drive train 4302 is permitted to advance to deploy staples into tissue and/or cut the tissue. In the locked configuration, illustrated in FIG. 114, the drive train 4302 is prevented from being advanced either because no staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022 or an attached staple cartridge is spent.
• As illustrated in FIG. 113, the drive train 4302 includes a hole 4306 configured to receive the latch 4304 when the latch 4304 is in the locked configuration. An electrical circuit 4308 is configured to selectively transition the latch 4304 between the locked configuration and the unlocked configuration. The electrical circuit 4308 includes an electrical magnet 4310 which is configured to selectively transition the lockout mechanism 4300 between the locked configuration and the unlocked configuration. The electrical circuit 4308 further includes a power source 4312 and a power relay 4314 configured to selectively transmit energy to power the electrical magnet 4310. Powering the electrical magnet 4310 causes the lockout mechanism 4300 to be transitioned from a locked configuration to an unlocked configuration. In an alternative embodiment, powering the electrical magnet 4310 can cause the lockout mechanism 4300 to be transitioned from an unlocked configuration to a locked configuration.
• The electrical magnet 4310 is configured to selectively move the latch 4304 between a first position, where the latch 4304 is at least partially positioned in the hole 4306, and a second position, where the latch 4304 is outside the hole 4306. In other words, the electrical magnet 4310 is configured to selectively move the latch 4304 between a first position, where the latch 4304 interferes with advancement of the drive train 4302, and a second position, where the latch 4304 permits advancement of the drive train 4302. In an alternative embodiment, a drive train of the firing system 4056 comprises a protrusion or a latch configured to be received in a hole of a corresponding structure that is operably attached to the electrical magnet 4310. In such an embodiment, the electrical magnet 4310 is configured to selectively move the structure comprising the hole between the first position and the second position. Although a latch and a corresponding structure that includes a hole are described in connection with the lockout mechanism 4300, it is understood that other mechanical mating members can be employed.
• As illustrated in FIG. 113, the lockout mechanism 4300 further includes a piston 4315 comprising a biasing member such as, for example, a spring 4316 movable between an first compressed configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 114, and a second compressed configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 115. In the second compressed configuration, the spring 4316 lifts or maintains the latch 4304 out of engagement with the drive train 4302, as illustrated in FIG. 115. When the spring 4316 is allowed to return to the first compressed configuration, the latch 4304 is also returned into engagement with the drive train 4302, as illustrated in FIG. 114.
• Further to the above, a permanent magnet 4318 is attached to the latch 4304. Alternatively, the latch 4304, or at least a portion thereof, can be made from a ferromagnetic material. When the electrical circuit 4308 activates the electrical magnet 4310, the permanent magnet 4318 is attracted toward the electrical magnet 4310 causing the spring 4316 to be biased or compressed. In addition, the permanent magnet 4318 causes the latch 4304 to be lifted or transitioned out of engagement with the drive train 4302, as illustrated in FIG. 115. However, when the electrical circuit 4308 deactivates the electrical magnet 4310, the biasing force of the spring 4316 returns the permanent magnet 4318 and the latch 4304 to their original positions where the latch 4304 is engaged with the drive train 4302, as illustrated in FIG. 114.
• Referring to FIG. 116, a safety mechanism 4347 of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument may include a controller 4050 which may comprise a processor 4052 and/or one or more storage mediums such as, for example, a memory 4054. By executing instruction code stored in the memory 4054, the processor 4052 may control activating and/or deactivating the lockout mechanism 4300. The processor 4052 may receive input 4320 regarding whether a staple cartridge is attached to the carrier 4022 and/or whether an attached staple cartridge is spent. Depending on the received input, the processor 4052 may activate or deactivate the lockout mechanism 4300 to permit or prevent the firing system 4056 from being used to perform a staple firing stroke.
• FIGS. 118-120B generally depict a motor-driven surgical fastening and cutting instrument 4500. As illustrated in FIGS. 118 and 119, the surgical instrument 4500 includes a handle assembly 4502, a shaft assembly 4504, and a power assembly 4506 (“power source,” “power pack,” or “battery pack”). The shaft assembly 4504 includes an end effector 4508 which can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue, although, in other instances, different types of end effectors may be used, such as end effectors for other types of surgical devices, graspers, cutters, staplers, clip appliers, access devices, drug/gene therapy devices, ultrasound devices, RF device, and/or laser devices, for example. Several RF devices may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL FASTENING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
• Referring primarily to FIGS. 119-120B, the handle assembly 4502 can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable shaft assemblies such as, for example, the shaft assembly 4504. Such interchangeable shaft assemblies may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, the end effector 4508 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. Examples of suitable interchangeable shaft assemblies are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
• Referring primarily to FIG. 119, the handle assembly 4502 may comprise a housing 4510 that contains a handle 4512 that may be configured to be grasped, manipulated and actuated by a clinician. However, it will be understood that the various arrangements of the various forms of interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may also be effectively employed in connection with robotically-controlled surgical systems. Thus, the term “housing” may also encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein and their respective equivalents. For example, the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein.
• Referring again to FIG. 119, the handle assembly 4502 operably supports a plurality of drive systems therein that can be configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly that is operably attached thereto. For example, the handle assembly 4502 operably supports a first or closure drive system, which is employed to apply closing and opening motions to the shaft assembly 4504 while operably attached or coupled to the handle assembly 4502. The handle assembly 4502 operably supports a firing drive system that is configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly attached thereto.
• Referring primarily to FIGS. 120A and 120B, the handle assembly 4502 includes a motor 4514 which is controlled by a motor control circuit 4515 and is employed by the firing system of the surgical instrument 4500. The motor 4514 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM. Alternatively, the motor 4514 may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor. The motor control circuit 4515 may comprise an H-Bridge field-effect transistors (FETs) 4519, as illustrated in FIGS. 120A and 120B. The motor 4514 is powered by the power assembly 4506 (FIGS. 120A and 120B) which can be releasably mounted to the handle assembly 4502 for supplying control power to the surgical instrument 4500. The power assembly 4506 comprises a battery which may include a number of battery cells connected in series that can be used as the power source to power the surgical instrument 4500. The battery cells of the power assembly 4506 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable. In at least one example, the battery cells can be Lithium-Ion batteries which can be separably couplable to the power assembly 4506.
• The shaft assembly 4504 includes a shaft assembly controller 4522 which communicates with the power management controller 4516 through an interface while the shaft assembly 4504 and the power assembly 4506 are coupled to the handle assembly 4502. The interface may comprise a first interface portion 4525 which includes one or more electric connectors for coupling engagement with corresponding shaft assembly electric connectors and a second interface portion 4527 which includes one or more electric connectors for coupling engagement with corresponding power assembly electric connectors to permit electrical communication between the shaft assembly controller 4522 and the power management controller 4516 while the shaft assembly 4504 and the power assembly 4506 are coupled to the handle assembly 4502. One or more communication signals can be transmitted through the interface to communicate one or more of the power requirements of the attached interchangeable shaft assembly 4504 to the power management controller 4516. In response, the power management controller modulates the power output of the battery of the power assembly 4506, as described below in greater detail, in accordance with the power requirements of the attached shaft assembly 4504. One or more of the electric connectors comprise switches which can be activated after mechanical coupling engagement of the handle assembly 4502 to the shaft assembly 4504 and/or to the power assembly 4506 to allow electrical communication between the shaft assembly controller 4522 and the power management controller 4516.
• The interface facilitates transmission of the one or more communication signals between the power management controller 4516 and the shaft assembly controller 4522 by routing such communication signals through a main controller 4517 residing in the handle assembly 4502. Alternatively, the interface can facilitate a direct line of communication between the power management controller 4516 and the shaft assembly controller 4522 through the handle assembly 4502 while the shaft assembly 4504 and the power assembly 4506 are coupled to the handle assembly 4502.
• The main controller 4517 may be any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. The surgical instrument 4500 may comprise a power management controller 4516 such as a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation. The safety processor may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options.
• The main controller 4517 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments. The Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet. The present disclosure should not be limited in this context.
• The power assembly 4506 includes a power management circuit which comprises the power management controller 4516, a power modulator 4538, and a current sense circuit 4536. The power management circuit is configured to modulate power output of the battery based on the power requirements of the shaft assembly 4504 while the shaft assembly 4504 and the power assembly 4506 are coupled to the handle assembly 4502. For example, the power management controller 4516 can be programmed to control the power modulator 4538 of the power output of the power assembly 4506 and the current sense circuit 4536 is employed to monitor power output of the power assembly 4506 to provide feedback to the power management controller 4516 about the power output of the battery so that the power management controller 4516 may adjust the power output of the power assembly 4506 to maintain a desired output.
• It is noteworthy that one or more of the controllers of the present disclosure may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules. Although certain modules and/or blocks of the surgical instrument 4500 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used. Further, although various instances may be described in terms of modules and/or blocks to facilitate description, such modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
• The surgical instrument 4500 may comprise an output device 4542 which includes one or more devices for providing a sensory feedback to a user. Such devices may comprise visual feedback devices (e.g., an LCD display screen, LED indicators), audio feedback devices (e.g., a speaker, a buzzer) or tactile feedback devices (e.g., haptic actuators). The output device 4542 may comprise a display 4543 which may be included in the handle assembly 4502. The shaft assembly controller 4522 and/or the power management controller 4516 can provide feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 4500 through the output device 4542. The interface 4524 can be configured to connect the shaft assembly controller 4522 and/or the power management controller 4516 to the output device 4542. The reader will appreciate that the output device 4542 can instead be integrated with the power assembly 4506. In such circumstances, communication between the output device 4542 and the shaft assembly controller 4522 may be accomplished through the interface 4524 while the shaft assembly 4504 is coupled to the handle assembly 4502.
• Having described a surgical instrument 4500 in general terms, the description now turns to a detailed description of various electrical/electronic component of the surgical instrument 4500. For expedience, any references herein to the surgical instrument 4500 should be construed to refer to the surgical instrument 4500 shown in connection with FIGS. 118-120B. Turning to FIG. 117, a circuit 4700 is depicted. The circuit 4700 is configured to control a powered surgical instrument, such as the surgical instrument 4500 illustrated in FIG. 118. The circuit 4700 is configured to control one or more operations of the powered surgical instrument 4500. The circuit 4700 includes a safety processor 4704 and a main or primary processor 4702. The safety processor 4704 and/or the primary processor 4702 are configured to interact with one or more additional circuit elements to control operation of the powered surgical instrument 4500. The primary processor 4702 comprises a plurality of inputs coupled to one or more circuit elements. The circuit 4700 can be a segmented circuit. In various instances, the circuit 4700 may be implemented by any suitable circuit, such as a printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) within the powered surgical instrument 4500.
• It should be understood that the term processor as used herein includes any microprocessor, microcontroller, or other basic computing device that incorporates the functions of a computer's central processing unit (CPU) on an integrated circuit or at most a few integrated circuits. The processor is a multipurpose, programmable device that accepts digital data as input, processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as output. It is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. Processors operate on numbers and symbols represented in the binary numeral system.
• The primary processor 4702 is any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. The safety processor 4604 may be a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation. In one embodiment, the safety processor 4704 may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options.
• The primary processor 4702 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments. The Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet. Other processors may be readily substituted and, accordingly, the present disclosure should not be limited in this context. Examples of powered surgical instruments that include primary processors and safety processors are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272574, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SLEEP OPTIONS OF SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND WAKE UP CONTROL, filed Mar. 26, 2014, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
• The safety processor 4704 is configured to implement a watchdog function with respect to one or more operations of the powered surgical instrument 4500. In this regard, the safety processor 4704 employs the watchdog function to detect and recover from malfunctions of the primary processor 4702. During normal operation, the safety processor 4704 monitors for hardware faults or program errors of the primary processor 4702 and to initiate corrective action or actions. The corrective actions may include placing the primary processor 4702 in a safe state and restoring normal system operation. In at least one aspect, the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 operate in a redundant mode.
• The primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 are housed in a handle portion of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. At least one of the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 is in communication with a shaft processor 4706 through an interface 4707. The shaft processor 4706 is configured to receive input from a cartridge detection system 4709 configured to detect whether an unspent staple cartridge has been attached to the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500.
• The circuit 4700 further includes a motor 4714 operably coupled to a firing member of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. One or more rotary position encoders 4741 can be configured to provide feedback to the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 as to the operational status of the motor 4714. A motor driver, including a metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) 4711, controls power delivery to the motor 4714 from a power source 4713. The MOSFET 4711 is controlled by an AND logic gate 4717. A high output of the AND logic gate 4717 causes the MOSFET 4711 to be activated, which causes the motor 4714 to run. The high output of the AND logic gate 4717 depends on receiving an input from the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704, as illustrated in FIG. 117. The primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 are configured to independently determine whether to allow the motor 4714 to run. Said another way, the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 are configured to independently determine whether to permit advancement of the firing member of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500.
• In the event of an agreement, where both of the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 determine to run the motor 4714, the AND logic gate 4717 produces a high output causing the MOSFET 4711 to be activated thereby allowing the motor 4714 to run and, in turn, the firing member to be advanced to fire the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. However, in the event of a disagreement, where only one of the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 determines to run the motor 4714 while the other one of the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 determines not to run the motor 4714, the AND logic gate 4717 fails to produce a high output and, in turn, the MOSFET 4711 remains inactive.
• Further to the above, the decision as to whether to run the motor 4714 depends, at least in part, on information communicated to the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 through the interface 4707 regarding whether or not an unspent staple cartridge has been attached to the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. As described in greater detail elsewhere herein, a cartridge detection system 4709 can be employed to determine, among other things, whether or not an unspent staple cartridge, is attached to the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500.
• Referring to FIGS. 117A-117B, a translatable staple firing member 4460 of a stapling assembly 4400 of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 is movable between a proximal, unfired, or start position and a distal, fired, or end position along a staple firing path 4463. A detectable magnetic element 4461, for example, is mounted to the staple firing member 4460 which moves along, or at least substantially along, the staple firing path 4463. In at least one instance, the magnetic element 4461 is a permanent magnet, for example, which is comprised of iron, nickel, and/or any other suitable material. The cartridge detection system 4709 comprises a first, or proximal, sensor 4401′ and a second, or distal, sensor 4401 which are configured to detect the magnetic element 4461 as it moves along the staple firing path 4463 with the staple firing member 4460. The first sensor 4401′ and the second sensor 4401 each comprise a Hall Effect sensor; however, the sensors 4401′ and 4401 can comprise any suitable sensor. The sensors 4401′ and 4401 output a voltage that varies depending on their respective distances from the magnetic element 4461 (a higher voltage is output when the distance is small and a lesser voltage is output when the distance is great).
• Further to the above, the cartridge detection system 4709 comprises a sensor circuit 4708 including, among other things, a voltage source 4403, for example, in communication with the sensors 4401′ and 4401 which supplies power to the sensors 4401′ and 4401. The sensor circuit 4708 further comprises a first switch 4405′ in communication with the first sensor 4401′ and a second switch 4405 in communication with the second sensor 4401. In at least one instance, the switches 4401′ and 4401 each comprise a transistor, such as a FET, for example. The outputs of the sensors 4401′, 4401 are connected to the central (gate) terminal of the switches 4405′, 4405, respectively. Prior to the firing stroke of the staple firing member 4460, the output voltages from the sensors 4401′, 4401 are high so that the first switch 4405′ and the second switch 4405 are in closed conditions.
• When the magnetic element 4461 passes by the first sensor 4401′, the voltage output of the first sensor 4401′ is sufficient to change the first switch between a closed condition and an open condition. Similarly, the voltage output of the second sensor 4401 is sufficient to change the second switch 4405 between a closed condition and an open condition when the magnetic element 4461 passes by the second sensor 4401. When both of the switches 4405′ and 4405 are in an open condition, a ground potential is applied to an operational amplifier circuit 4406. The operational amplifier circuit 4406 is in signal communication with an input channel of a shaft processor 4706 of the motor controller and, when a ground potential is applied to the operational amplifier circuit 4406, the processor 4706 receives a ground signal from the circuit 4406.
• When the processor 4706 receives a ground signal from the circuit 4406, the processor 4706 can determine that the staple firing stroke has been completed and that the staple cartridge positioned in the stapling assembly 4400 has been completely spent. Other embodiments are envisioned in which the sensor system is configured to detect a partial firing stroke of the staple firing member 4460 and supply a signal to the processor 4706 that indicates that the staple cartridge has been at least partially spent. In either event, the motor controller can be configured to prevent the staple firing member 4460 from performing another firing stroke until the staple cartridge has been replaced with an unspent cartridge. In at least one instance, further to the above, the sensor system comprises a sensor configured to detect whether the spent cartridge has been detached from the stapling assembly and/or whether an unspent cartridge has been assembled to the stapling assembly.
• Further to the above, the sensor system can be configured to detect whether the staple firing member 4460 has been retracted along a retraction path 4462. In at least one instance, the magnetic element 4461 can be detected by the sensor 4401 as the magnetic element 4461 is retracted along the path 4462 and change the second switch 4405 back into a closed condition. Similarly, the magnetic element 4461 can be detected by the sensor 4401′ as the magnetic element 4461 is retracted along the path 4463 and change the first switch 4405′ back into a closed condition. By closing the switches 4405 and 4405′, the voltage polarity from the battery 4403 is applied to the circuit 4406 and, as a result, the processor 4706 receives a Vcc signal from the circuit 4406 on its input channel.
• Further to the above, the cartridge detection system 4709 includes a cartridge circuit 4724. The cartridge circuit 4624 is similar in many respects to the cartridge circuit 4024 (FIG. 97). For example, the cartridge circuit 4724 includes a trace element 4734 which is transitioned between a severed status, where the staple cartridge is spent, and an intact status, where the staple cartridge is unspent. As illustrated in FIG. 117, the trace element 4734 is positioned in parallel with a first resistive element 4737 and in series with a second resistive element 4737′ to insure that the detection of failure of the sensor or interruption of its circuit is not merely lack of signal output. One or more sensors, including but not limited to voltage and/or current sensors, can be employed to detect a current status and/or a transition between severed status and an intact status.
• As illustrated in FIG. 117, accurate communications between the processors 4702, 4704, and 4706 can be ensured using security codes such as, for example, cyclic redundancy checks (CRC) which are error-detecting codes attached to data communications to detect accidental changes in communicated data which may occur during data transmission. Blocks of data entering these systems get a short check value attached, based on the remainder of a polynomial division of their contents. In certain instances, two parameter sets with separate CRCs are loaded into the shaft processor 4706 wherein one is normal and the other has a STOP command, for example, and parameters like a 0 mm transection length.
• In at least one instance, the primary processor 4702 tracks the status of the trace element 4734 via a shared universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) pin, and the position of the motor 4714 via the rotary position encoder 4741, for example. The primary processor 4702 can be configured to prevent the motor 4714 from running if the primary processor 4702 detects that the trace element 4734 has been severed.
• In various instances, the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 can be configured to prevent the motor 4714 from running if a movement of the firing member is detected by the proximal sensor 4401′, as described above, after a severed status of the trace element 4734 is detected. The detection of the movement of the firing member and the severed status of the trace element 4734 can be performed by the cartridge detection system 4709, as described above. The shaft processor 4706 can be configured to send a STOP command to the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 a severed status of the trace element 4734 is detected. The communication between the shaft processor 4706, the primary processor 4702, and/or the safety processor 4704 can be a CRC communication, for example. In various instances, the safety processor 4704 is configured to watch for the STOP command and to enter a sleep mode once the STOP command is received. In various instances, the safety processor 4704 is configured to stop the motor 4714 from running if a computed CRC, which is computed from the received data, does not match the received CRC. A CRC verification module can be employed by the safety processor 4704 to compute a CRC from the received data and compare the computed CRC with the received CRC.
• In various instances, the primary processor 4702, the safety processor 4704, and/or the shaft processor 4706 may comprise security code generator modules and/or security code verification modules. Security codes can be generated by CHECK-SUM, HASH, or other suitable protocols. The security code generation module and/or the security code verification module may be implemented in hardware, firmware, software or any combination thereof. Ensuring the validity of the communications between the primary processor 4702, the safety processor 4704, and/or the shaft processor 4706 is important because body fluids may interfere with communicated signals between such processors.
• As described above, the shaft processor 4706 can be configured to send a STOP command to the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 via a CRC communication. In one example, the shaft processor 4706 includes a security code generator configured to generate a security code and attached the security code to the STOP command transmitted to the primary processor 4702, for example. The primary processor 4702 includes a security code verification module configured to verify the integrity of the transmission received from the shaft processor 4706. The security code verification module is configured to compute a security code based on the received STOP command data and compare the computed security code to the security code received with the STOP command data. If the primary processor 4702 confirms the integrity of the received message, the primary processor 4702 may activate a stop mode 4688, for example.
• In certain instances, the safety processor 4704 may be tasked with ensuring the integrity of messages transmitted to the primary processor 4702. In one example, the safety processor 4704 includes a security code verification module configured to verify the integrity of a message transmission from the shaft processor 4706. The security code verification module of the safety processor 4704 is configured to compute a security code based on the received STOP command data and compare the computed security code to the security code received with the STOP command data. If the safety processor 4704 confirms the integrity of the received message, the safety processor 4704 may activate a stop mode 4688 (FIG. 124), for example.
• Turning now to FIG. 121, a circuit 4600 is configured to control a powered surgical instrument, such as the surgical instrument 4500 illustrated in FIG. 118. The circuit 4600 is configured to control one or more operations of the powered surgical instrument 4500. The circuit 4600 includes a safety processor 4604 and a main or primary processor 4602, which are similar in many respects to the safety processor 4704 and the primary processor 4702, respectively. The safety processor 4604 and/or the primary processor 4602 are configured to interact with one or more additional circuit elements to control operation of the powered surgical instrument 4500. The primary processor 4602 comprises a plurality of inputs coupled to one or more circuit elements. The circuit 4600 can be a segmented circuit. In various instances, the circuit 4600 may be implemented by any suitable circuit, such as a printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) within the powered surgical instrument 4500.
• The circuit 4600 comprises a feedback element in the form of a display 4609. The display 4609 comprises a display connector coupled to the primary processor 4602. The display connector couples the primary processor 4602 to a display 4609 through one or more display driver integrated circuits. The display driver integrated circuits may be integrated with the display 4609 and/or may be located separately from the display 4609. The display 4609 may comprise any suitable display, such as an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, a liquid-crystal display (LCD), and/or any other suitable display. In some embodiments, the display 4609 is coupled to the safety processor 4604. Furthermore, the circuit 4600 further comprises one or more user controls 4611, for example.
• The safety processor 4604 is configured to implement a watchdog function with respect to one or more operations of the powered surgical instrument 4500. In this regard, the safety processor 4604 employs the watchdog function to detect and recover from malfunctions of the primary processor 4602. During normal operation, the safety processor 4604 is configured to monitor for hardware faults or program errors of the primary processor 4602 and to initiate corrective action or actions. The corrective actions may include placing the primary processor 4602 in a safe state and restoring normal system operation.
• In at least one aspect, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 operate in a redundant mode. The primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 are coupled to at least a first sensor. The first sensor measures a first property of the surgical instrument 4500. The primary processor 4602 is configured to determine an output based on the measured first property of the surgical instrument 4500 and compare the output to a predetermined value. Likewise, the safety processor 4604 is configured to separately determine an output based on the measured first property of the surgical instrument 4500 and compare the output to the same predetermined value. The safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 are configured to provide a signal indicative of the value of their determined outputs. When either the safety processor 4604 or the primary processor 4602 indicates a value outside of an acceptable range, appropriate safety measures can be activated. In certain instances, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 receive their inputs from separate sensors that are configured to separately measure the first property of the surgical instrument 4500. In certain instances, when at least one of the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 indicates a value within an acceptable range, the surgical instrument 4500 is allowed to continue in a normal mode of operation. For example, the firing system 4056 can be allowed to complete a firing stroke of the surgical instrument 4500 when at least one of the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 indicates a value within an acceptable range. In such instances, a discrepancy between the values or results determined by the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 can be attributed to a faulty sensor or a calculation error, for example.
• As illustrated in FIG. 121, linear position encoders 4640 and 4641 are coupled to the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604, respectively. The position encoder 4640 provides speed and position information about a firing member of the powered surgical instrument 4500 to the primary processor 4602 an analog to digital converters 4623 a (ADCs). Likewise, the position encoder 4640 provides speed and position information about a firing member of the powered surgical instrument 4500 to the safety processor 4604 through a separate analog to digital converter 4623 b (ADCs). The primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 are configured to execute an algorithm for calculating at least one acceleration of the firing member based on the information derived from the linear position encoders 4640 and 4641. The acceleration of the firing member can be determined based on the following equation:
• $a=\frac{v_2-v_1}{t_2-{\mathrm{<figure-callout\; id="1"\; label="v"\; filenames="US20180168615A1-20180621-D00079.png,US20180168615A1-20180621-D00081.png"\; state="\{\{state\}\}">v</figure-callout>}}_1}$
• wherein a is the current acceleration of the firing member, wherein v₂ is a current velocity of the firing member recorded at time t₂, and wherein v₁ is a previous velocity of the firing member at a previous time t₁.
• The acceleration of the firing member can also be determined based on the following equation:
• $a=\frac{d_2-d_1}{{\left(t_2-t_1\right)}^2}$
• wherein a is the current acceleration of the firing member, wherein d₂ is a distance traveled by the firing member between an initial position and a current position during a time t₂, and wherein d₁ is a distance traveled by the firing member between an initial position a previous position during a time t₁.
• The primary processor 4602 is further configured to compare the determined acceleration value to a predetermined threshold acceleration which can be stored in a memory unit in communication with the primary processor 4602, for example. Likewise, the safety processor 4604 is configured to compare its determined acceleration value to a predetermined threshold acceleration which can be stored in a memory unit in communication with the safety processor 4604, for example. In the event the primary processor 4602 and/or the safety processor 4604 determine that the determined acceleration values are beyond the a predetermined threshold acceleration, appropriate safety measures can be taken such as, for example, stopping power delivery to the motor 4514 and/or resetting the firing system 4056. Alternatively, in certain instances, when at least one of the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 indicates an acceptable acceleration value, the surgical instrument 4500 is allowed to continue in a normal mode of operation. For example, the firing system 4056 can be allowed to complete a firing stroke of the surgical instrument 4500 when at least one of the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 reports an acceptable acceleration. In such instances, a discrepancy between the values or results determined by the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 can be attributed to a faulty sensor or a calculation error, for example.
• As described above, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 are further configured to compare the determined acceleration values to a predetermined threshold acceleration which can be stored in a memory unit, for example. The threshold acceleration can be determined from a threshold force corresponding to a failure load of a lockout mechanism of the firing system 4056. In certain instances, the failure load is known to be about 100 lbf. In such instances, Newton's second law of motion can be employed to determine the corresponding threshold acceleration based on the equation:
• 
  F=m×a,
• wherein F is the threshold force, and m is the mass exerting the force.
• Acceleration of the firing member of the firing system 4056 can also be assessed by tracking the electrical current drawn by a motor 4514 during a firing stroke. The load on a firing member driven by the motor 4514 through a firing stroke is directly related the electrical current drawn by a motor 4514. Accordingly, the load experienced by the firing member can be assessed by measuring the electrical current drawn by the motor 4514 during a firing stroke. Newton's second law of motion can be employed to calculate the acceleration of the firing member based on the load experienced by the firing member which can be assessed by tracking the electrical current drawn by a motor 4514 during the firing stroke.
• As illustrated in FIG. 122A, a sensor 4617 can be coupled to a motor control circuit 4619 to measure the current drawn by the motor 4514 during the firing stroke. In at least one instance, the sensor 4617 can be a current sensor or a Hall effect sensor, for example. The readings of the sensor 4617 can be amplified using a buffer amplifier 4625, digitized using an ADC 4623, and transmitted to the primary processor 4602 (FIG. 121) and the safety processor 4604 (FIG. 121) which are configured to execute an algorithm to determine the corresponding load on the firing member and determine an acceleration of the firing member based on Newton's second law of motion.
• Referring to FIG. 122A, the sensor 4617 can be coupled to the motor control circuit 4619 to measure the current drawn by the motor 4514 during the firing stroke. During normal operation of the motor 4514, the readings of the sensor 4617 are expected to be within a normal predetermined range. As illustrated in FIG. 122B, the normal range can have a minimum threshold of about 0.5 A, for example, and a maximum threshold of about 5.0 A, for example. A sensor reading above the maximum threshold or a sensor reading above zero but below the minimum threshold can indicate a failure in the sensor 4617. The maximum threshold can be any value selected from a range of about 4.0 A, for example, to 6.0 A, for example. The minimum threshold can be any value selected from a range of about 0.4 A, for example, to 0.6 A, for example.
• As described above, the readings of the sensor 4617 can be amplified using a buffer amplifier 4625, digitized using an ADC 4623, and transmitted to the primary processor 4602 which is configured to execute an algorithm to determine whether the readings of the sensor 4617 are within a predetermined normal range. In the event it is determined that the readings of the sensor 4617 is beyond the predetermined normal range, appropriate safety measures can be taken by the primary processor 4602. In one example, the primary processor 4602 may permit completion of the firing stroke in a safe mode because the abnormal motor current readings are likely due to a faulty sensor 4617. In another example, the primary processor may cause power delivery to the motor 4514 to be stopped and alert a user to utilize a mechanical bailout feature. The primary processor 4602 may alert a user through the display 4058 to contact a service department to replace the faulty sensor 4617. The primary processor 4602 may provide instructions on how to replace the faulty sensor 4617.
• In certain instances, the safety processor 4604 can be configured to receive readings from another sensor, independent from the sensor 4617, configured to separately measure the current drawn by the motor 4514 during the firing stroke. Like the primary processor 4602, the safety processor 4604 can be configured to execute an algorithm to determine whether the readings of the other sensor are within a predetermined normal range. If at least one of the primary processor 4602 and the secondary processor 4604 determines that the current drawn by the motor 4514 is within the predetermined normal range, the motor 4514 is allowed to complete the firing stroke. In such instances, a discrepancy between the values or results determined by the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 are attributed to a faulty sensor or a calculation error, for example.
• In certain instances, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 can be configured to track or determine at least one acceleration of a firing member of the firing system 4056 using different techniques. If at least one of the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 determines that the acceleration of the firing member is within a normal range, the firing member is allowed to complete the firing stroke. A discrepancy between the acceleration values determined by the safety processor 4604 and the primary processor 4602 can be attributed to a faulty sensor or a calculation error. This ensures unnecessary interruptions of the firing system 4056 that are due to a faulty sensor or a calculation error.
• In one example, the primary processor 4602 can be configured to determine or track an acceleration of a firing member of the firing system 4056 using a first technique. For example, the primary processor 4602 can be configured to determine or track an acceleration of the firing member by employing the sensor 4617 to measure the current drawn by the motor 4514. The primary processor 4602 can then execute an algorithm for calculating at least one acceleration of the firing member based on input from the sensor 4617, as described above. On the other hand, the safety processor 4604 can be configured to determine or track the acceleration of the firing member using a second technique, different than the first technique. For example, the safety processor 4604 can be configured to determine or track the same acceleration of the firing member by employing the position encoders 4640 to detect the position of the firing member during a firing stroke. The safety processor 4604 can execute an algorithm for calculating at least one acceleration of the firing member based on input from the position encoders 4640, as described above. The calculated accelerations can be compared against a predetermined normal range. In the event, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 are in agreement that their respective acceleration values are within the normal range, the firing member is allowed to complete the firing stroke. If, however, the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 are in agreement that their respective acceleration values are outside the normal range, appropriate safety measures can be taken by the primary processor 4602, for example, as described above. In the event of a discrepancy between the outcomes determined by the primary processor 4602 and the safety processor 4604 with regard to the acceleration of the firing member, the firing member is allowed to complete the firing stroke.
• Firing the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 involves a mechanical component, where a firing trigger is squeezed by a user, and an electrical component, where an electrical current flows to the motor 4514 in response to a transition of the motor control circuit 4515 from an open configuration to a closed configuration when the firing trigger is squeezed by the user. A trigger-sensing control circuit 4627 (FIG. 122A) of the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 includes a firing-trigger Hall effect sensor 4629 which is configured to detect the transition of the firing trigger 4550 between an open configuration and a closed configuration. In addition, the trigger-sensing control circuit 4627 also includes a verification-trigger Hall effect sensor 4631 configured to detect current drawn by the motor 4514 when the firing trigger is transitioned to the closed configuration. The sensors 4629 and 4631 are in signal communication with the primary processor 4602 and/or the safety processor 4604. The readings of the sensor 4629 and 4631 are amplified using buffer amplifiers 4625, digitized using ADCs 4623 and transmitted to the primary processor 4602 and/or the safety processor 4604 for analysis and comparison.
• During normal operation, the transmitted readings of the sensors 4629 and 4631 provide a redundant assurance to the primary processor 4602 that the mechanical and electrical components involved in the firing of the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 are functioning properly. In the event of a disagreement, where the sensor 4629 indicates that firing trigger has been squeezed while the sensor 4631 indicates that no current is being drawn by the motor 4514, the primary processor 4602 may determine that the sensor 4631 is not functioning properly. Where the sensor 4629 fails to indicate that firing trigger has been squeezed while the sensor 4631 indicates that current is being drawn by the motor 4514, the primary processor 4602 may determine that the sensor 4629 is not functioning properly. In one aspect, the primary processor 4602 may permit completion of the firing stroke in a safe mode because the disagreement is attributed to a faulty sensor. In another example, the primary processor may cause power delivery to the motor 4514 to be stopped and alert a user, for example, to utilize a mechanical bailout feature. The primary processor 4602 may alert a user through the display 4058 to contact a service department to replace the faulty sensor. The primary processor 4602 may provide instructions on how to replace the faulty sensor.
• As illustrated in FIG. 121, the primary processor 4602 and/or the safety processor 4604 are in signal communication with one or more linear position encoders 4640 and/or one or more rotary position encoders 4641. The rotary position encoder 4641 is configured to identify the rotational position and/or speed of a motor 4514. In addition, the linear position encoder 4640 is configured to identify the position and/or speed of the firing member which is driven by the motor 4514 during a firing stroke of the surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500.
• During normal operation, the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641 are in correlation with the readings of the linear position encoders 4640. This is because the motor 4514 is operably coupled to the firing member such that the rotation of the motor 4514 causes the firing member to be advanced during the firing stroke. The readings of the rotary position encoder 4641 may not correlate with the readings of the linear position encoders 4640 if the advancement speed of the firing member is outside a tolerance band as measured by the linear position encoder 4640. Upon detecting a loss in the correlation between the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641 and the readings of the linear position encoders 4640, appropriate safety measures can be activated by the primary processor 4602 and/or the safety processor 4604.
• In various instances, an input member such as, for example, a sensor or switch can be positioned in parallel with a first resistive element and in series with a second resistive element to insure that the detection of failure of the sensor or interruption of its circuit is not merely lack of signal output. Referring to FIG. 123, an electrical circuit 4650 includes a beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 positioned in parallel with a first resistive element 4654 and in series with a second resistive element 4656. In addition, the electrical circuit 4650 includes an end-of-stroke switch 4662 positioned in parallel with a first resistive element 4664 and in series with a second resistive element 4666. Examples of beginning and end of stroke switches are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,210,411, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, issued on Jul. 3, 2012, which is incorporated herein by reference its entirety.
• The electrical circuit 4650 also includes a voltage source 4660 providing an input voltage of 5 volts, for example. As illustrated in FIG. 123, output voltages 4659 and 4669 can be processed by buffer amplifiers 4625 and ADCs 4623 to generate digital outputs which can be communicated to the primary processor 4602. The primary processor 4602 is configured to execute an algorithm to assess one or more statuses of the circuit 4650 based on the received digital outputs. In the event the output voltage 4659 is equal to the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4658 are disconnected. In the event the output voltage 4659 is equal to half of the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4658 are connected but the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 is in an open configuration. In the event the output voltage 4659 is equal to one third of the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4658 are connected and the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 is in a closed configuration. In the event the output voltage 4659 is equal to zero, the primary processor 4602 determines that there is a short in the circuit 4650. In certain instances, determining that the output voltage 4659 is equal to zero indicates a failure of the end-of-stroke switch 4652. In certain instances, determining that the output voltage 4659 is equal to the input voltage indicates a failure of the end-of-stroke switch 4652.
• In the event the output voltage 4669 is equal to the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4668 are disconnected. In the event the output voltage 4669 is equal to half of the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4668 are connected but the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is in an open configuration. In the event the output voltage 4669 is equal to one third of the input voltage of the voltage source 4660, the primary processor 4602 determines that connection wires 4668 are connected and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is in a closed configuration. In the event the output voltage 4669 is equal to zero, the primary processor 4602 determines that there is a short in the circuit 4650. In certain instances, determining that the output voltage 4669 is equal to zero indicates a failure of the end-of-stroke switch 4662. In certain instances, determining that the output voltage 4669 is equal to the input voltage indicates a failure of the end-of-stroke switch 4662.
• Referring now to FIGS. 124-127, a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 may comprise a failure response system 4681 that includes a number of operational modes that can be selectively engaged in response to input, or the lack thereof, from the above-described positions encoders, sensors, and/or switches of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. As illustrated in FIG. 124, a warning mode 4682 is activated if the readings of the sensor 4617, which represent current drawn by the motor 4514, are beyond a predetermined normal range. The warning mode 4682 is also activated if a failure of at least one of the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is detected.
• The warning mode 4682 is limited to providing a user of the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 with a warning without taking additional steps to stop or modify the progress or parameters of a firing stroke. The warning mode 4682 is activated in situations where aborting a firing stroke is unnecessary. For example, the warning mode 4682 is activated when a detected error is deemed to be attributed to a failed sensor or switch. The warning mode 4682 employs the user interface 4058 to deliver a visual, audio, and/or haptic warning.
• The powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 further includes a warning/back-up system mode 4680. The warning/back-up system mode 4680 is activated if the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 do not correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641. Like the warning mode 4682, the warning/back-up system mode 4680 employs the user interface 4058 to deliver a visual, audio, and/or haptic warning. In addition, warning/back-up system mode 4680 causes a back-up system to be activated. During normal operation, a normal mode 4684 employs a primary system that includes primary sensors and primary control means. However, a back-up system which comprises secondary sensors and/or secondary control means is used in lieu of the primary system if an error is detected that warrants activation of the warning/back-up system mode 4680.
• Further to the above, the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 also includes a limp mode 4686 which is a failure response mode or state that is triggered if (i) the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 do not correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641 and (ii) a failure of at least one of the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is detected. Like the warning mode 4682, the limp mode 4686 employs the user interface 4058 to deliver a visual, audio, and/or haptic warning. In addition, the limp mode 4686 slows the progress of the firing stroke.
• In certain instances, the limp mode 4686 can reduce a current rotational speed of the motor 4514 by any percentage selected from a range of about 75% to about 25%. In one example, the limp mode 4686 can reduce a current rotational speed of the motor 4514 by 50%. In one example, the limp mode 4686 can reduce the current rotational speed of the motor 4514 by 75%. The limp mode 4686 may cause a current torque of the motor 4514 to be reduced by any percentage selected from a range of about 75% to about 25%. In one example, the limp mode 4686 may cause a current torque of the motor 4514 to be reduced by 50%.
• Further to the above, the powered surgical cutting and stapling instrument 4500 also includes a stop mode 4688 which is an escalated failure response mode or state that is triggered if (i) the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 do not correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641, (ii) a failure of at least one of the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is detected, and (iii) the readings of the sensor 4617, which represent current drawn by the motor 4514, are beyond a predetermined normal range. Like the warning mode 4682, the stop mode 4688 employs the user interface 4058 to deliver a visual, audio, and/or haptic warning. In addition, when triggered, the stop mode 4688 causes the motor 4514 to be deactivated or stopped leaving only a mechanical bailout system available for use to retract the firing member to a starting position. The stop mode 4688 employs the user interface 4058 to provide a user with instructions on operating the bailout system. Examples of suitable bailout systems are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272569, entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, filed Mar. 26, 2014, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
• The above-identified operational modes of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 create redundant electronic control pathways that enable operation of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 even as some of the inputs, switches, and/or sensors fail integrity checks. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 124, triggering the limp mode 4686 requires detecting two separate and discrete failures, and triggering the stop mode 4688 requires detecting three separate and discrete failures. A single failure, however, only triggers the warning mode 4682. In other words, the failure response system 4681 of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 is configured to escalate to a more secure mode of operation in response to an escalation in detected failures.
• The failure response system 4681 can be implemented using integrated and/or discrete hardware elements, software elements, and/or a combination of both. Examples of integrated hardware elements may include processors, microprocessors, controllers, integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor devices, chips, microchips, chip sets, microcontroller, system-on-chip (SoC), and/or system-in-package (SIP). Examples of discrete hardware elements may include circuits and/or circuit elements (e.g., logic gates, field effect transistors, bipolar transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, relay and so forth). In other embodiments, one or more controllers of the present disclosure may include a hybrid circuit comprising discrete and integrated circuit elements or components on one or more substrates, for example.
• In at least one instance, the failure response system 4681 can be implemented by a circuit including a controller that comprises one or more processors (e.g., microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to at least one memory circuit. The at least one memory circuit stores machine executable instructions that when executed by the processor, cause the processor to execute machine instructions to implement one or more of the functions performed by the failure response system 4681. The processor may be any one of a number of single or multi-core processors known in the art. The memory circuit may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media. The processor may include an instruction processing unit and an arithmetic unit. The instruction processing unit may be configured to receive instructions from the one memory circuit.
• In at least one aspect, the failure response system 4681 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a combinational logic circuit configured to implement one or more of the functions performed the failure response system 4681. In one embodiment, a failure response system 4681 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a sequential logic circuit. The sequential logic circuit may comprise the combinational logic circuit and at least one memory circuit, for example. The at least one memory circuit can store a current state of the finite state machine. The sequential logic circuit or the combinational logic circuit can be configured to implement one or more of the functions performed by one or more controllers of the present disclosure such as, for example, the controller. In certain instances, the sequential logic circuit may be synchronous or asynchronous.
• In at least one aspect, as illustrated in FIG. 124, the failure response system 4681 is implemented, at least in part, using a number of logic gates. A logic circuit 4691 can be configured to deliver a binary input to an AND logic gate 4690 as to whether the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641. The second input of the AND gate 4690 is delivered through an OR logic gate 4692 which receives inputs from the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662. The OR logic gate 4692 delivers a high output to the AND logic gate 4690 if a failure of at least one of the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is detected. The AND logic gate 4690 delivers a high output, which causes the limp mode 4686 to be activated, if the logic circuit 4691 and the OR logic gate 4692 deliver high outputs to the AND logic gate 4690.
• Further to the above, a logic inverter or a NOT logic gate 4694 maintains the normal mode 4684 in the absence of a high output from the AND logic gate 4690. An AND gate 4696 is responsible for causing the stop mode 4688 to be activated upon receiving a high output from the AND logic gate 4690 and a high output from a high output from a logic circuit 4698 configured to monitor current drawn by the motor 4514. The logic circuit 4698 is configured to receive the readings of the sensor 4617, which represent current drawn by the motor 4514, and deliver a high output when such readings are beyond a predetermined normal range which indicates a sensor failure. An OR logic gate 4699 is configured to cause the warning mode 4682 to be activated upon receiving a high output from one of the logic circuit 4698 and the OR logic gate 4692.
• Referring to FIG. 125, an alternative embodiment of a failure response system 4681′ is depicted. The failure response system 4681′ is similar in many respects to the failure response system 4681 and includes the normal mode 4684, the limp mode 4686, and the stop mode 4688. The failure response system 4681′ includes the AND logic gate 4690, the OR logic gate 4692, and an AND logic gate 4674. A logic circuit 4670, which can be configured to implement a decision block, is configured to receive an input from the AND logic gate 4690. The logic circuit 4670 is configured to activate the limp mode 4686 if the logic circuit 4670 receives positive input from the AND logic gate 4690. However, if the logic circuit 4670 does not receive a positive input from the AND logic gate 4690, the normal mode 4684 remains active.
• Further to the above, the failure response system 4681′ includes a second logic circuit 4672, which can be configured to implement a decision block. The second logic circuit 4672 is configured to receive an input from an AND logic gate 4674. The AND logic gate 4674 delivers a positive output if the limp mode 4686 is active and the logic circuit 4698 determines that the readings of the sensor 4617, which represent current drawn by the motor 4514, are beyond a predetermined normal range. If, however, the AND logic gate 4674 does not deliver an output to the logic circuit 4672, the limp mode 4686 remains active.
• Referring to FIG. 126, a failure response system 5001 is similar in many respects to the failure response system 4681, and includes the limp mode 4686 and the stop mode 4688. The failure response system 5001 is configured to transition the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 from the limp mode 4686 to a stop mode 4688 if (i) the trigger-sensing control circuit 4627 determines that the readings of the firing-trigger Hall sensor 4629 and the verification-trigger Hall effect sensor 4631 do not correlate, and (ii)(a) the beginning-stroke-switch 4652 is in a closed configuration (FIG. 123) or (ii)(b) the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 do not correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641.
• As illustrated in FIG. 126, the failure response system 5001 includes an OR logic gate configured to receive a positive input 5008 if the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 do not correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641. The OR logic gate 5004 is also configured to receive a positive input 5006 from the electrical circuit 4650 (FIG. 123) if the beginning-stroke-switch 4652 is in a closed configuration. The failure response system 5001 further includes an AND logic gate 5010 configured to receive a positive input 5012 from the trigger-sensing control circuit 4627 if the trigger-sensing control circuit 4627 determines that the readings of the firing-trigger Hall sensor 4629 and the verification-trigger Hall effect sensor 4631 do not correlate. The OR logic gate 5004 is configured to deliver a positive input to the AND logic gate 5010 in response to receiving one of the inputs 5006 and 5008.
• The failure response system 5001 further includes a logic circuit 5002, which is configured to implement a decision block. The logic circuit 5002 is configured to maintain a limp mode 4686 in the absence of a positive output of the AND logic gate 5010. The logic circuit 5002 is further configured to transition from the limp mode 4686 to the stop mode 4688 in the presence of a positive output from the AND logic gate 5010.
• Referring to FIG. 127, an alternative embodiment of a failure response system 5021 is depicted. The failure response system 5021 is similar in many respects to the failure response system 4681 and includes the normal mode 4684 and the stop mode 4688. The failure response system 5021 is configured to maintain the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 in the normal mode 4684 until three separate failures are detected, as described in greater detail below. Upon detecting such failures, the failure response system 5021 causes the stop mode 4688 to be activated.
• Further to the above, the failure response system 5021 includes an AND logic gate 5024, an OR logic gate 5026, and an AND logic gate 5028. A logic circuit 5022, which can be configured to implement a decision block, is configured to receive an input from the AND logic gate 5024. The logic circuit 5022 is configured to activate the stop mode 4688 if the logic circuit 5022 receives a positive input from the AND logic gate 5024. However, if the logic circuit 5024 does not receive a positive input from the AND logic gate 5024, the normal mode 4684 remains active.
• As illustrated in FIG. 127, the AND logic gate 5024 is coupled to the logic circuit 4691, which is configured to deliver a binary input to an AND logic gate 5024 as to whether the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 correlate with the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641. The second input of the AND gate 5024 is delivered through the AND logic gate 5026 which is which is coupled to the logic circuit 4698. The logic circuit 4698 is configured to deliver a binary output to the AND logic gate 5026 as to whether the readings of the sensor 4617, which represent current drawn by the motor 4514, are beyond a predetermined normal range. The second input of the AND gate 5026 is delivered through an OR logic gate 5028 which receives inputs from the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662. The OR logic gate 5028 delivers a high output to the AND logic gate 4690 if a failure of at least one of the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662 is detected.
• Accordingly, the failure response system 5021 protects against malfunctions that are based on sensor and/or switch errors by requiring a plurality of sensor and/or switch errors to be detected before activating the stop mode 4688. This ensures that a single point failure such as a failure of a sensor and/or a switch will not by itself render the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 inoperable. The failure response system 5021 requires a plurality of inputs to indicate failures prior to activating the stop mode 4688. When one failure is reported such as, for example, a lack of correlation between the readings of the linear position encoder 4640 the readings of the rotary position encoder 4641, the failure response system 5021 is configured to look for failures in other related or relevant inputs such as, for example, motor current inputs, inputs from the beginning-of-stroke switch 4652 and the end-of-stroke switch 4662, before activating the stop mode 4688.
• In at least one instance, a first circuit and a second circuit are configured to separately assess or detect an operational parameter of a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 such as, for example, an operational parameter in connection with the performance of a firing member during a firing stroke of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500. In at least one instance, the second circuit output can be used to verify and/or as a substitute, within a control loop of the firing stroke, for the output of the first circuit should the output of the first circuit be identified as erroneous.
• For example, the primary processor 4702 can be configured to track a first operational parameter by assessing the current drawn by the motor 4514 during the firing stroke, and the safety processor 4704 can be configured to track a second operational parameter by assessing correlation between the rotational motion of the motor 4514 and the linear motion of the firing member during the firing stroke. Under normal operating conditions, the current drawn by the motor 4514 corresponds to the speed of the firing member and/or falls within a normal predetermined range. Also, under normal operating conditions, the rotational motion of the motor 4514 correlates with the linear motion of the firing member. Accordingly, the primary processor 4702 and the safety processor 4704 separately track separate operational parameters of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 that provide feedback as to the performance of the firing member within a control loop of the firing stroke.
• The primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 may be configured to generate outputs indicative of whether their respective operational parameters are within normal operating conditions. In one example, the output of the safety processor 4704 can be used to verify and/or as a substitute, within a control loop of the firing stroke, for the output of the primary processor 4702 should the assessment of operational parameter of the safety processor 4704 be identified as erroneous or indicative of abnormal operating conditions while the second operational parameter indicates normal operating conditions.
• The outputs of the primary processor 4702 and/or the safety processor 4704 may comprise activating an operational mode of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 selected from a group comprising a normal mode, a warning mode, a limp mode, and a stop mode. In one example, the output of the primary processor 4702 may comprise activating a failure response mode such as, for example, a limp mode or a stop mode but if the output of the safety processor 4704 comprises activating/continuing a normal mode of operation, the normal mode is used as a substitute for the failure response mode. Accordingly, the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 will continue to operate in normal mode in spite of the error identified based on the assessment of the operational parameter tracked by the primary processor 4702.
• In one example, a failure response system can be configured to activate a first failure response mode if a first error is detected, a second failure response mode if a second error is detected in addition to the first error, and a third failure response mode if a third error is detected in addition to the first and second errors. In at least one instances, a powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 remain operational in the first failure response mode and the second failure response mode, and is deactivated in the third failure response mode.
• In one example, a failure response system can be configured to elevate or escalate a failure response to accommodate an escalation in detected failures. In one example, a failure response system is configured to transition from a first failure response mode to a second response failure response mode in response to an increase in detected errors, wherein the detected errors include at least one sensor failure and/or at least one switch failures. In one example, a failure response system is configured to activate transition from a first failure response mode to a second failure response mode in response to an increase in detected errors, wherein the detected errors include at least one measurement outside a predetermine normal range.
• In one example, a failure response system is configured to activate a first failure response mode if a first error is detected and is configured to transition from the first failure response mode to a second failure response mode if a second error is detected in addition to the first error. In one example, a failure response system is configured to activate a first failure response mode if a first plurality of errors are detected and is configured to transition from the first failure response mode to a second failure response mode if a second plurality of errors are detected, wherein the second plurality of errors are greater than the first plurality of errors, and wherein the second plurality of errors encompasses the first plurality of errors. In one example, the second failure response mode involves a greater number of restrictions on operation of the powered surgical stapling and cutting instrument 4500 than the first failure response mode.
• FIGS. 128-133 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10100 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10100 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10110 and a distal forming pocket 10130 defined in a planar, or tissue-engaging, surface 10107 of an anvil 10101. The pockets 10110, 10130 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10103 of the forming pocket arrangement 10100. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10103 by the forming pocket arrangement 10100 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 129 and 130, the forming pocket arrangement 10100 further comprises a bridge, or ridge, portion 10105 defined between the forming pockets 10110, 10130. In this instance, the bridge portion 10105 is part of the planar surface 10107 of the anvil 10101. The bridge portion 10105 comprises a bridge width “W”. The forming pocket arrangement 10100 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10105. The forming pocket arrangement 10100 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10105, bilaterally symmetric with respect to the pocket axis 10103, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket 10110 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10113 and the forming pocket 10130 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10133. The pocket sidewalls 10113, 10133 are configured to direct the tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10110, 10130 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10113, 10133 of the pockets 10110, 10130. Referring to FIGS. 131-133, the sidewalls 10113, 10133 extend from the planar surface 10107 of the anvil 10101 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10110, 10130. The sidewalls 10113, 10133 of the forming pockets 10110, 10130 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10107 of the anvil 10101 at angle θ in order to direct, or channel, the staple legs and/or the tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces. The sidewalls 10113, 10133 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10103 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10110, 10130.
• Referring again to FIG. 129, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10110, 10130 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10111, 10131 and an exit zone forming surface 10112, 10132, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10111, 10131 cover is equal to the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10112, 10132 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10111, 10131 transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10112, 10132 in the center of each pocket 10110, 10130. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10111, 10131 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10112, 10132 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10110, 10130. The valleys of the forming pockets 10110, 10130 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10107.
• Referring to FIG. 130, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10110, 10130 comprise a longitudinal radius of curvature 10117, 10137, respectively. In this instance, the longitudinal radius of curvature 10117 is equal to the radius of curvature 10137. Also, in this instance, the longitudinal radius of curvature 10117 and the longitudinal radius of curvature 10137 can form a symmetric staple. In other embodiments, the longitudinal radius of curvature 10117 and the longitudinal radius of curvature 10137 are different and can form an asymmetric staple.
• The valleys of the forming pockets 10110, 10130 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10110, 10130. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10130 taken along line 132-132 in FIG. 129. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10130. The outer edges of each pocket 10110, 10130 define the widest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10110, 10130. FIG. 131 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10130 taken along line 131-131 in FIG. 129 which is within the exit zone forming surface 10132 of the distal forming pocket 10130. FIG. 133 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10130 taken along line 133-133 in FIG. 129 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10132 of the distal forming pocket 10130. A proximal staple leg is configured to land in the entry zone forming surface 10111 of the proximal forming pocket 10110 and exit in the exit zone forming surface 10112 of the proximal forming pocket 10110. Similarly, a distal staple leg is configured to land in the entry zone forming surface 10131 of the distal forming pocket 10130 and exit in the exit zone forming surface 10132 of the distal forming pocket 10130.
• FIGS. 134-139 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10200 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10200 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10210 and a distal forming pocket 10230 defined in a planar, or tissue-engaging, surface 10207 of an anvil 10201. The pockets 10210, 10230 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10203 of the forming pocket arrangement 10200. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10203 by the forming pocket arrangement 10200 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 135 and 136, the forming pocket arrangement 10200 further comprises a bridge portion 10205 defined between the forming pockets 10210, 10230. In this instance, the bridge portion 10205 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10207 of the anvil 10201. The bridge portion 10205 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bridge portion 10205 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10207. The forming pocket arrangement 10200 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10205. The forming pocket arrangement 10200 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10205, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 10203, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10200 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 10208 extending from the planar surface 10207 of the anvil 10201 toward the pockets 10210, 10230 and the bridge portion 10205. The primary sidewalls 10208 are angled at angle θ₂ with respect to the planar surface 10207 of the anvil 10201. The forming pocket arrangement 10200 further comprises edge features 10215, 10235 which provide a transition feature between the outer edges of the pockets 10210, 10230 and the planar surface 10207, between the longitudinal edges of the pockets 10210, 10230 and the primary sidewalls 10208, and between the inner edges of pockets 10210, 10230 and the bridge portion 10205. These edges 10215, 10235 can be rounded, and/or chamfered, for example. The edge features 10215, 10235 may help prevent staple tips from sticking, as discussed in greater detail below.
• The forming pocket 10210 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10213 and the forming pocket 10230 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10233. The pocket sidewalls 10213, 10233 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10210, 10230 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10213, 10233 of the pockets 10210, 10230. The sidewalls 10213, 10233 extend from the transition edges 10215, 10235 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10210, 10230. The sidewalls 10213, 10233 of the forming pockets 10210, 10230 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10207 of the anvil 10201 at angle θ₁ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or the staple tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10210, 10230. The sidewalls 10213, 10233 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10203 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10210, 10230. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 10208 and the pocket sidewalls 10213, 10233 can provide a funnel-like configuration for directing staple tips. Referring to FIGS. 137 and 138, the angle θ₁ is greater than the angle θ₂.
• The pockets 10210, 10230 further comprise transition edges 10214, 10234 which provide a transition feature between the pocket sidewalls 10213, 10233 and the forming surfaces, as discussed in greater detail below. In various instances, the transition edges 10214, 10234 can comprise a similar profile as the transition edges 10215, 10235. In other instances, the transition edges 10214, 10234 can comprise a different profile than the transition edges 10215, 10235. That said, the edges 10214, 10234 can be rounded, or chamfered, for example. The edges 10214, 10234 comprise a first end where the edges 10214, 10234 meet the outer ends of the pockets 10210, 10230 and a second end where the edges 10214, 10234 approach the bridge portion 10205, or the inner ends of the pockets 10210, 10230. The edges 10214, 10234 may transition into the transition edges 10215, 10235 near the bridge portion 10205. The edge features 10214, 10234 may also help prevent staple tips from sticking in the pockets 10210, 10230 when forming, as discussed in greater detail below.
• Referring again to FIG. 135, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10210, 10230 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10211, 10231 and an exit zone forming surface 10212, 10232, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10211, 10231 cover is greater than the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10212, 10232 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10211, 10231 do not transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10212, 10232 in the center of each pocket 10210, 10230. Rather, the transition points where the entry zones 10211, 10231 transition to the exit zones 10212, 10232 are closer to the bridge portion 10205. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10211, 10231 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10212, 10232 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10210, 10230. The valleys of the forming pockets 10210, 10230 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10207.
• Referring to FIG. 136, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10210, 10230 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 10210 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10217 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10211 and an exit radius of curvature 10218 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10212. Similarly, the pocket 10230 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10237 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10231 and an exit radius of curvature 10238 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10232. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 10217, 10237 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 10218, 10238, respectively. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• In addition to defining the transition points where the entry zones transition to the exit zones, the valleys of the forming pockets 10210, 10230 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10210, 10230. The outer edges of each pocket 10210, 10230, also referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 10211, 10231, comprise an entry width. The inner edges of each pocket 10210, 10230, also referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 10212, 10232, comprise an exit width. In this instance, the entry width is greater than the exit width. Also, the exit width is greater than the valley width, or the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10230 taken along line 138-138 in FIG. 135. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10230. This valley, or trough, is also the transition between the entry zone forming surface 10231 and the exit zone forming surface 10232. FIG. 137 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10230 taken along line 137-137 in FIG. 135 which is located within the exit zone forming surface 10232 of the forming pocket 10230. FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10230 taken along line 139-139 in FIG. 135 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10232 of the distal forming pocket 10230.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10200, and various other forming pocket arrangements disclosed herein, are configured to be used with staples with various diameters. The diameters of staples to be used with the forming pocket arrangement 10200 can vary between about 0.0079 inches and about 0.0094 inches, for example. Additionally, the entry radius of curvature and the exit radius of curvature of each forming surface comprise a ratio of about 1.5:1 to about 3:1 when the entry radius is between about 8× the staple diameter and 10× the staple diameter, for example. In at least one instance, the entry radius of curvature and the exit radius of curvature of each forming surface comprise a ratio of about 2:1 when the entry radius is 9× the staple diameter, for example. In other instances, the entry radius of curvature and the exit radius of curvature of each forming surface comprise a ratio of about 1.5:1 to about 3:1 when the entry radius is above about 0.6× the staple crown length and the ridge, or bridge, width is less than 1× the staple diameter, for example. In at least one instance, the entry radius of curvature and the exit radius of curvature of each forming surface comprise a ratio of about 2:1 when the entry radius is above about 0.6× the staple crown length and the ridge, or bridge, width is less than 1× the staple diameter. The exit radius of curvature is between about 4× the staple diameter and about 6× diameter, for example. In at least one instance, the exit radius of curvature is about 4.5× the staple diameter.
• FIGS. 140-145 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10300 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10300 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10310 and a distal forming pocket 10330 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10307 of an anvil 10301. The pockets 10310, 10330 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10303 of the forming pocket arrangement 10300. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10303 by the forming pocket arrangement 10300 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 141 and 142, the forming pocket arrangement 10300 further comprises a bridge portion 10305 defined between the forming pockets 10310, 10330. In this instance, the bridge portion 10305 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10307 of the anvil 10301. The bridge portion 10305 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bridge portion 10305 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10307. The forming pocket arrangement 10300 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10305. The forming pocket arrangement 10300 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10305, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 10303, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10300 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 10308 extending from the planar surface 10307 of the anvil 10301 toward the pockets 10310, 10330 and the bridge portion 10305. The primary sidewalls 10308 are angled at angle θ₂ with respect to the planar surface 10307 of the anvil 10301. The forming pocket arrangement 10300 further comprises a pair of edge features 10309 which provide a transition feature between the lateral edges of the pockets 10310, 10330 and the primary sidewalls 10308. The edges 10309 also provide a transition feature between central portions of the primary sidewalls 10308 and the bridge portion 10305. These edges 10309 can be rounded, and/or chamfered, for example. The edge features 10309 may help prevent staple tips from sticking, as discussed in greater detail below.
• The forming pocket 10310 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10313 and the forming pocket 10330 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10333. The pocket sidewalls 10313, 10333 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10310, 10330 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10313, 10333 of the pockets 10310, 10330. The sidewalls 10313, 10333 extend from the transition edges 10309 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10310, 10330. The sidewalls 10313, 10333 of the forming pockets 10310, 10330 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10307 of the anvil 10301 at angle θ₁ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or staple tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10310, 10330. The sidewalls 10313, 10333 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10303 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10310, 10330. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 10308 and the pocket sidewalls 10313, 10333 can provide a funnel-like configuration for corresponding staple tips. Referring to FIGS. 143 and 144, the angle θ₁ is greater than the angle θ₂. In this instance, the pocket sidewalls 10313, 10333 can be considered aggressive. For example, the angle θ₁ is 80 degrees. Similarly, the angle θ₂ is significantly less aggressive than the angle θ₁. For example the angle θ₂ is 4 degrees. Angle θ₃ (FIG. 144) is defined as the angle between the sidewalls 10333 is between about 0 degrees and about 10 degrees. In various instances, the angle θ₃ is 0 degrees and the walls 10333 are at least substantially parallel to each other.
• The pockets 10310, 10330 further comprise transition edges 10306 which provide a transition feature between the pocket sidewalls 10313, 10333 and the forming surfaces, as discussed in greater detail below. In various instances, the transition edges 10306 can comprise a similar profile as the transition edges 10309. In other instances, the transition edges 10306 can comprise a different profile than the transition edges 10309. That said, the edges 10307 can be rounded, or chamfered, for example. The edges 10306, 10309 comprise a first end where the edges 10306, 10309 meet the outer ends of the pockets 10310, 10330 and a second end where the edges 10306, 10309 approach the bridge portion 10305, or the inner ends of the pockets 10310, 10330. The edges 10306 may transition into the transition edges 10309 near the bridge portion 10305. The edge features 10306 may also help prevent staple tips from sticking in the pockets 10310, 10330 when forming, as discussed in greater detail below.
• Referring again to FIG. 141, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10310, 10330 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10311, 10331 and an exit zone forming surface 10312, 10332, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10311, 10331 cover is greater than the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10312, 10332 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10311, 10331 do not transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10312, 10332 in the center of each pocket 10310, 10330. Rather, the transition points where the entry zones 10311, 10331 transition to the exit zones 10312, 10332 are closer to the bridge portion 10305. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10311, 10331 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10312, 10332 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10310, 10330. The valleys of the forming pockets 10310, 10330 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10307. Note, when using the term “entry”, “entry” corresponds to the intended “entry” feature where a staple tip is intended to enter a staple pocket during the staple firing process. Similarly, when using the term “exit”, “exit” corresponds to the intended “exit” feature where a staple tip is intended to exit a staple pocket during the staple firing process.
• Referring to FIG. 142, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10310, 10330 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 10310 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10317 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10311 and an exit radius of curvature 10318 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10312. Similarly, the pocket 10330 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10337 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10331 and an exit radius of curvature 10338 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10332. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 10317, 10337 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 10318, 10338. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• The outer edges of each pocket 10310, 10330, also referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 10311, 10331, comprise an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10310, 10330. The inner edges of each pocket 10310, 10330, also referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 10312, 10332, comprise an exit width which is the narrowest section of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10310, 10330. In various instances, the exit widths are larger than the largest diameter staple configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement 10300. The transitions between entry and exit zones comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width. FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10330 taken along line 144-144 in FIG. 141. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10330. This valley, or trough, is also the transition between the entry zone forming surface 10331 and the exit zone forming surface 10332. FIG. 143 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10330 taken along line 143-143 in FIG. 141 which is located within the exit zone forming surface 10332 of the forming pocket 10330. FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10330 taken along line 145-145 in FIG. 141 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10332 of the distal forming pocket 10330.
• FIGS. 146-151 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10400 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10400 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10410 and a distal forming pocket 10430 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10407 of an anvil 10401. The pockets 10410, 10430 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10403 of the forming pocket arrangement 10400. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10403 by the forming pocket arrangement 10400 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 147 and 148, the forming pocket arrangement 10400 further comprises a bridge portion 10405 defined between the forming pockets 10410, 10430. In this instance, the bridge portion 10405 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10407 of the anvil 10401. The bridge portion 10405 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bridge portion 10405 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10407. The forming pocket arrangement 10400 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10405. The forming pocket arrangement 10400 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10405, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 10403, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10400 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 10408 extending from the planar surface 10407 of the anvil 10401 toward the pockets 10410, 10430 and the bridge portion 10405. Specifically, each sidewall 10408 shares an edge with only a portion of each pocket, as discussed in greater detail below. The primary sidewalls 10408 are angled at angle θ₄ with respect to the planar surface 10407 of the anvil 10401.
• Each forming pocket 10410, 10430 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls, wherein each pocket sidewall of each pair comprises discrete, sidewall portions. For example, the proximal forming pocket 10410 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls, each comprising discrete sidewall portions 10413 and 10416. The sidewall portions 10413 may be referred to as entry sidewalls portions and the sidewalls portions 10416 may be referred to as exit sidewalls portions. Similarly, the distal forming pocket 10430 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls, each comprising discrete sidewall portions 10433 and 10436 respectively. The sidewall portions 10433 may be referred to as entry sidewalls portions and the sidewalls portions 10436 may be referred to as exit sidewalls portions. The pocket sidewalls 10413, 10416, 10433, 10436 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10410, 10430 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10413, 10416, 10433, 10436 of the pockets 10410, 10430.
• The sidewall portions 10413 extend from the planar surface 10407 toward the forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 10410. The sidewall portions 10413 transition into the forming surface via transition feature 10414. Another transition feature 10417 is provided between the discrete sidewall portions 10413 and 10416 to provide the discrete, sidewall features. The transition features 10414, 10417 may comprise rounded and/or chamfered surfaces, for example. The transition features 10414, 10417 may, instead, comprise a discrete edge. The sidewall portions 10416 share an edge with the primary sidewalls 10408 and extend from the primary sidewalls 10408 toward the forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 10410. The sidewalls 10413 and 10416 are orientated at different angles with respect to the pocket axis 10403. In this instance, the sidewall portion 10413 is at least substantially parallel with respect to the pocket axis 10403 and the sidewall portion 10416 is angled at angle θ₃ with respect to the pocket axis 10403. The phrase “substantially parallel” refers to an orientation that is nearly parallel to, or parallel to, the pocket axis 10403.
• The sidewall portions 10433 extend from the planar surface 10407 toward the forming surface of the distal forming pocket 10430. The sidewall portions 10433 transition into the forming surface via transition feature 10434. Another transition feature 10437 is provided between the discrete sidewall portions 10433 and 10436 to provide the discrete, sidewall features. The transition features 10434, 10437 may comprise rounded and/or chamfered surfaces, for example. The transition features 10434, 10437 may, instead, comprise a discrete edge. The sidewall portions 10436 share an edge with the primary sidewalls 10408 and extend from the primary sidewalls 10408 toward the forming surface of the distal forming pocket 10430. The sidewalls 10433 and 10436 are orientated at different angles with respect to the pocket axis 10403. In this instance, the sidewall portion 10433 is at least substantially parallel with respect to the pocket axis 10403 and the sidewall portion 10436 is angled at angle θ₃ with respect to the pocket axis 10403. The phrase “substantially parallel” refers to an orientation that is nearly parallel to, or parallel to, the pocket axis 10403.
• Referring now to FIGS. 149-151, the sidewall portions 10413, 10433 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10407 of the anvil 10401 at a different angle than the sidewall portions 10416, 10436. For the sake of brevity, only the configuration of the sidewalls of the distal forming pocket 10430 will be discussed; however, it should be noted that due to the symmetry of the pockets 10410, 10430 discussed above, the proximal forming pocket 10410 comprises a configuration symmetric of the distal forming pocket 10430. Beginning with FIG. 151, the entry sidewall portions 10433 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10407 at angle θ₁. Referring now to FIG. 150, the exit sidewall portions 10436 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10407 at angle θ₂. Angle θ₂ is greater than angle θ₁. Angle θ₂ is between about 60 degrees and about 90 degrees, for example. In various instances, angle θ₂ is about 80 degrees. In other instances, angle θ₂ is about 90 degrees. As can be seen in the figures, the exit sidewall portions 10436 are more aggressively angled, or more vertical, than the entry sidewall portions 10433. Collectively, the sidewall portions 10433, 10436 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10407 of the anvil 10401 in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or staple tips of the staples toward the forming surface of the distal pocket 10430 and, additionally, control the forming of the legs, as discussed in greater detail below. Also, collectively, the primary sidewalls 10408 and the pocket sidewalls 10413, 10416, 10433, 10436 can provide a funnel-like configuration for corresponding staple tips.
• Further to the above, the transition edges 10414, 10434 provide a transition feature between the pocket sidewall portions 10413, 10416, 10433, 10436 and the forming surfaces. The edges 10414, 10434 comprise a first end where the edges 10414, 10434 meet the outer ends of the pockets 10410, 10430 and a second end where the edges 10414, 10434 meet the bridge portion 10405, or the inner ends of the pockets 10410, 10430. The edge features 10414, 10434 may help prevent staple tips from sticking in the pockets 10410, 10430 when forming, as discussed in greater detail below.
• Referring again to FIG. 147, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10410, 10430 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10411, 10431 and an exit zone forming surface 10412, 10432, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10411, 10431 cover is greater than the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10432 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10411, 10431 do not transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10432 in the center of each pocket 10410, 10430. Rather, the transition points where the entry zones 10411, 10431 transition to the exit zones 10412, 10432 are closer to the bridge portion 10405. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10411, 10431 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10432 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10410, 10430. The valleys of the forming pockets 10410, 10430 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10407. In this instance, the transition between the entry zone forming surfaces 10411, 10431 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10432 occurs at the transition features 10417, 10437.
• Referring to FIG. 148, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10410, 10430 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 10410 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10418 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10411 and an exit radius of curvature 10419 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10412. Similarly, the pocket 10430 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10438 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10431 and an exit radius of curvature 10439 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10432. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 10418, 10438 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 10419, 10439. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• The outer edges of each pocket 10410, 10430, also referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 10411, 10431, comprise an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10410, 10430. The inner edges of each pocket 10410, 10430, also referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10432, comprise an exit width which is narrower than the entry width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10410, 10430. The transitions between entry and exit zones comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width. In various instances, the transition width is similar to the exit width (FIG. 147). The exit zone forming surfaces 10412, 10413 comprise the narrowest sections of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10410, 10430. In this instance, the narrowest section is the valley, or trough, of each pocket 10410, 10430. In various instances, the valley comprises a width greater than the largest diameter staple configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement 10400. FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10430 taken along line 150-150 in FIG. 147. This view is taken along a section of the entry zone forming surface 10431 and illustrates the transition of each discrete, sidewall portions 10433, 10436. FIG. 149 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10430 taken along line 149-149 in FIG. 147 which is located within the exit zone forming surface 10432 of the forming pocket 10430. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10430 taken along line 151-151 in FIG. 147 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10432 of the distal forming pocket 10430.
• FIGS. 152-157 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10500 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10500 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10510 and a distal forming pocket 10530 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10507 of an anvil 10501. The pockets 10510, 10530 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10503 of the forming pocket arrangement 10500. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10503 by the forming pocket arrangement 10500 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 153 and 154, the forming pocket arrangement 10500 further comprises a bridge portion 10505 defined between the forming pockets 10510, 10530. In this instance, the bridge portion 10505 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10507 of the anvil 10501. The bridge portion 10505 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge portion 10505 is substantially V-shaped with a rounded bottom portion. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bottom portion of the bridge portion 10505 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10507. The forming pocket arrangement 10500 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10505. The forming pocket arrangement 10500 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10505, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 10503, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10500 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 10508 extending from the planar surface 10507 of the anvil 10501 toward the pockets 10510, 10530 and the bridge portion 10505. The primary sidewalls 10508 are angled at angle θ₁ with respect to the planar surface 10507 of the anvil 10501. The primary sidewalls 10508 comprise inner edges that are curved, or contoured, with respect to the pockets 10510, 10530.
• The forming pocket 10510 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10513 and the forming pocket 10530 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10533. The pocket sidewalls 10513, 10533 comprise curved, or contoured, profiles and are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10510, 10530 as well as help control the forming process of the staples. The sidewalls 10513, 10533 extend from the primary sidewalls 10508 and the planar surface 10507 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10510, 10530. The sidewalls 10513, 10533 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10503 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10510, 10530. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 10508 and the pocket sidewalls 10513, 10533 cooperate to funnel corresponding staple tips toward the lateral center of each pocket 10510, 10530. Discussed in greater detail below, the sidewalls 10513, 10533 comprise entry portions and exit portions where the entry portions comprise a less aggressive channeling configuration than the exit portions.
• Referring again to FIG. 153, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10510, 10530 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10511, 10531 and an exit zone forming surface 10512, 10532, respectively. The entry zone forming surfaces 10511, 10531 can coincide with the less aggressive channeling portions of the sidewalls 10513, 10533. Similarly, the exit zone forming surfaces 10512, 10532 can coincide with the more aggressive channeling portions of the sidewalls 10513, 10533. The pockets 10510, 10530 further comprise a forming, or guiding, groove 10515, 10535, also referred to as a tip control channel, extending the entire longitudinal length of each pocket 10510, 10530 and positioned centrally with respect to the outer lateral edges of the pockets 10510, 10530. The grooves 10515, 10535 are narrower at the outer longitudinal edges of the pockets 10510, 10530 than the inner longitudinal edges of the pockets 10510, 10530. The grooves 10515, 10535 meet at the bridge portion 10505 to encourage the staple tips, and staple legs, to contact each other during the forming process, as discussed in greater detail below. In some instances, grooves defined in the forming surfaces of forming pockets can have a similar effect in staple forming as more aggressively-angled exit walls and/or narrowly-configured exit walls.
• Referring to FIG. 154, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10510, 10530 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 10510 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10517 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10511 and an exit radius of curvature 10518 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10512. Similarly, the pocket 10530 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10537 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10531 and an exit radius of curvature 10538 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10532. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 10517, 10537 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 10518, 10538. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• Referring now to FIGS. 155-157, the outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10510, 10530 are referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 10511, 10531. The entry edges comprise an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10510, 10530. The inner edges of each pocket 10510, 10530 are referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 10512, 10532. The exit edges comprise an exit width, also referred to as the bridge width “W” which is the narrowest section of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10510, 10530. The transitions between entry and exit zones comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10530 taken along line 156-156 in FIG. 153. This view is taken near the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10530. This valley, or trough, is also the transition between the entry zone forming surface 10531 and the exit zone forming surface 10532. In various instances, the transition between entry and exit zones does not occur at the valley, or trough, of the pocket. FIG. 155 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10530 taken along line 155-155 in FIG. 153 which is located within the exit zone forming surface 10532 of the forming pocket 10530. FIG. 157 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10530 taken along line 157-157 in FIG. 153 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10532 of the distal forming pocket 10530. The sidewalls 10533 are illustrated in this figure as linear, or at least substantially linear, and are angled at angle θ₂ with respect to the planar surface 10507. Angle θ₂ is greater than angle θ₁.
• Groove widths may be narrower than the largest-diameter staple that is configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement and larger than the smallest-diameter staple that is configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement. In other instances, the groove width may be narrower than the smallest-diameter staple configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement. Yet, in other instances, the groove width may be wider than the largest-diameter staple configured for use with the forming pocket arrangement. Additionally, grooves defined in the forming pockets may comprise multiple widths corresponding to the entry zone and the exit zone, accordingly. For example, a portion of the groove residing in the entry zone can comprise a width which is less than the width of a portion of the groove residing in the exit zone. In another example, a portion of the groove residing in the entry zone can comprise a width which is greater than the width of a portion of the groove residing in the exit zone. In other instances, a groove only residing in one of the zones can comprise multiple widths.
• FIGS. 158-163 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10600 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10600 is similar in many respects to the forming pocket arrangement 10100. The forming pocket arrangement 10600 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10610 and a distal forming pocket 10630 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10607 of an anvil 10601. The pockets 10610, 10630 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10603 of the forming pocket arrangement 10600. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10603 by the forming pocket arrangement 10600 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIG. 159, the forming pocket arrangement 10600 further comprises a bridge portion 10605 defined between the forming pockets 10610, 10630. In this instance, the bridge portion 10605 is part of the planar surface 10607 of the anvil 10601. The bridge portion 10605 comprises an inner bridge width “W₁” and an outer bridge width “W₂”. The inner bridge width “W₁” is less than the outer bridge width “W₂”. The forming pocket arrangement 10600 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10605. The forming pocket arrangement 10600 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10605, bilaterally symmetric with respect to the pocket axis 10603, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket 10610 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10613 and the forming pocket 10630 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10633. The pocket sidewalls 10613, 10633 are configured to direct the tips and legs of a staple toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10610, 10630 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10613, 10633 of the pockets 10610, 10630. Referring to FIGS. 161-163, the sidewalls 10613, 10633 extend from the planar surface 10607 of the anvil 10601 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10610, 10630. The sidewalls 10613, 10633 of the forming pockets 10610, 10630 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10607 of the anvil 10601 at angle θ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or tips of a staple toward the forming surfaces. The sidewalls 10613, 10633 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10603 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10610, 10630.
• Referring again to FIG. 158, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10610, 10630 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10611, 10631, an exit zone forming surface 10612, 10632, and a groove, or channel, 10615, 10635 defined in the forming surfaces, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10611, 10631 cover is equal to the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10612, 10632 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10611, 10631 transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10612, 10632 in the center of each pocket 10610, 10630. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10611, 10631 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10612, 10632 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10610, 10630. The valleys of the forming pockets 10610, 10630 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10607.
• The forming surfaces also comprise transition features 10616, 10636 surrounding the grooves 10615, 10635, respectively, as well as transition features 10617, 10637 at the inner and outer longitudinal edges of the pockets 10610, 10630, respectively. In this instance, the transition features 10616, 10617, 10636, 10637 are rounded, however, the transition features 10616, 10617, 10636, 10637 can comprise any suitable profile in addition to, or in lieu of, a rounded edge. The transition features 10616, 10636 provide a transition between the grooves 10615, 10635 and the forming surfaces of each pocket 10610, 10630. Toward the central region of each pocket 10610, 10630, the transition features 10616, 10636 may provide a transition between the grooves 10615, 10635 and the sidewalls 10613, 10633. The transition features 10617, 10637 provide a transition between the forming surfaces and the planar surface 10607. The transition features 10617, 10637 comprise extension portions 10618, 10638 positioned at the proximal and distal ends of each groove 10615, 10635.
• The valleys of the forming pockets 10610, 10630 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10610, 10630. FIG. 162 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10630 taken along line 162-162 in FIG. 158. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10630. The outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10610, 10630 define the widest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10610, 10630. FIG. 161 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10630 taken along line 161-161 in FIG. 158 which is within the exit zone forming surface 10632 of the distal forming pocket 10630. FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10630 taken along line 163-163 in FIG. 158 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10632 of the distal forming pocket 10630.
• FIGS. 164-168 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10700 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10700 is similar in many respects to the forming pocket arrangement 10600. The forming pocket arrangement 10700 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10710 and a distal forming pocket 10730 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10707 of an anvil 10701. The pockets 10710, 10730 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10703 of the forming pocket arrangement 10700. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10703 by the forming pocket arrangement 10700 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIG. 165, the forming pocket arrangement 10700 further comprises a bridge portion 10705 defined between the forming pockets 10710, 10730. In this instance, the bridge portion 10705 is part of the planar surface 10707 of the anvil 10701. The bridge portion 10705 comprises an inner bridge width “W₁” and an outer bridge width “W₂”. The inner bridge width “W₁” is less than the outer bridge width “W₂”. The forming pocket arrangement 10700 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10705. The forming pocket arrangement 10700 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10705, bilaterally symmetric with respect to the pocket axis 10703, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket 10710 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10713 and the forming pocket 10730 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10733. The pocket sidewalls 10713, 10733 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10710, 10730 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10713, 10733 of the pockets 10710, 10730. Referring to FIGS. 166-168, the sidewalls 10713, 10733 extend from the planar surface 10707 of the anvil 10701 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10710, 10730. The sidewalls 10713, 10733 of the forming pockets 10710, 10730 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10707 of the anvil 10701 at angle θ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or staple tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces. The sidewalls 10713, 10733 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10703 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10710, 10730.
• Referring again to FIG. 164, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10710, 10730 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10711, 10731, an exit zone forming surface 10712, 10732, and a groove, or channel, 10715, 10735 defined in the forming surfaces, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10711, 10731 cover is equal to the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10712, 10732 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10711, 10731 transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10712, 10732 in the center of each pocket 10710, 10730. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10711, 10731 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10712, 10732 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10710, 10730. The valleys of the forming pockets 10710, 10730 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10707.
• The grooves 10715, 10735, which are aligned with the pocket axis 10703, are defined only within a portion of each pocket 10710, 10730. In this instance, the grooves 10715, 10735 are positioned entirely within the exit zone forming surfaces 10712, 10732. In other instances, the grooves can be positioned entirely within the entry zones. The grooves 10715, 10735 comprise edges 10716, 10736 which provide a transition between the grooves 10715, 10735 and their respective forming surfaces. The edges 10716, 10736 comprise a rounded profile, however, flat, curved, and/or irregular profiles are contemplated, for example. The rounded profile may help prevent staple tip sticking, as discussed in greater detail below. The grooves 10715, 10735 extend from a central portion of their forming surface toward the bridge portion 10705 of the pocket arrangement 10700. The grooves 10715, 10735 extend into the bridge portion 10705 of the pocket arrangement 10700. In other words, the grooves 10715, 10735 extend beyond the inner longitudinal edges 10717, 10737 of each pocket 10710, 10730.
• Referring to FIG. 166, the groove 10735 and a staple “S” are illustrated. FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10730 taken along line 166-166 in FIG. 164. This cross-sectional view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 10732. The diameter of the staple “S” is larger than the width, or diameter, of the groove 10735. However, the diameter of the staple “S” is smaller than the width of the groove 10735 plus the transition edges 10736. This prevents the body of the staple “S” from contacting the bottom of the groove 10735. This configuration may help maintain minimal, dual-tangent contact between the staple “S” as it forms within the exit zone forming surface 10732 and exits the distal pocket 10730. Minimal contact between the staple and the pocket may help prevent staple tip sticking and provide a more continuously formed staple, as discussed in greater detail below. Staples used with this forming pocket arrangement may comprise a diameter larger than the width of the groove 10735 plus the width of the edges 10736. In this instance, among others, a similar dual-tangent contact would occur.
• The valleys of the forming pockets 10710, 10730 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10710, 10730. FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10730 taken along line 167-167 in FIG. 164. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10730. The outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10710, 10730 define the widest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10710, 10730. FIG. 168 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10730 taken along line 168-168 in FIG. 164 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10732 of the distal forming pocket 10730.
• FIGS. 169-173 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10800 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10800 is similar in many respects to the forming pocket arrangement 10600. The forming pocket arrangement 10800 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10810 and a distal forming pocket 10830 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10807 of an anvil 10801. The pockets 10810, 10830 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10803 of the forming pocket arrangement 10800. However, a staple is not intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10803 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Rather, a staple is intended to be formed away from the pocket axis 10803. Referring to FIG. 169, the forming pocket arrangement 10800 further comprises a bridge portion 10805 defined between the forming pockets 10810, 10830. In this instance, the bridge portion 10805 is part of the planar surface 10807 of the anvil 10801. The bridge portion 10805 comprises an inner bridge width “W₁” and an outer bridge width “W₂”. The inner bridge width “W₁” is less than the outer bridge width “W₂”. The forming pocket arrangement 10800 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10805. The forming pocket arrangement 10800 is bilaterally asymmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10805, bilaterally asymmetric with respect to the pocket axis 10803, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket 10810 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10813 and the forming pocket 10830 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10833. The pocket sidewalls 10813, 10833 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10810, 10830 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10813, 10833 of the pockets 10810, 10830. Referring to FIGS. 171-173, the sidewalls 10813, 10833 extend from the planar surface 10807 of the anvil 10801 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10810, 10830. The sidewalls 10813, 10833 of the forming pockets 10810, 10830 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10807 of the anvil 10801 at angle θ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or staple tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces. The sidewalls 10813, 10833 are configured to push, or guide, the staple tips and/or the legs of staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10810, 10830.
• Referring again to FIG. 169, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10810, 10830 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10811, 10831, an exit zone forming surface 10812, 10832, and a groove, or channel, 10815, 10835 defined in the forming surfaces, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10811, 10831 cover is equal to the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10812, 10832 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10811, 10831 transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10812, 10832 in the center of each pocket 10810, 10830. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10811, 10831 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10812, 10832 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10810, 10830. The valleys of the forming pockets 10810, 10830 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10807.
• The forming surfaces also comprise transition features 10816, 10836 surrounding the grooves 10815, 10835 as well as transition features 10817, 10837 at the inner and outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10810, 10830. In this instance, the transition features 10816, 10817, 10836, 10837 are rounded, however, the transition features 10816, 10817, 10836, 10837 can comprise any suitable profile in addition to, or in lieu of, a rounded edge, for example. The transition features 10816, 10836 provide a transition between the grooves 10815, 10835 and the forming surfaces of the pockets 10810, 10830, respectively. Toward the central region of the pockets 10810, 10830, the transition features 10816, 10836 may provide a transition between the grooves 10815, 10835 and the sidewalls 10813, 10833. The transition features 10817, 10837 provide a transition between the forming surfaces and the planar surface 10807. The transition features 10817, 10837 comprise extension portions positioned at the proximal and distal ends of the grooves 10815, 10835.
• The grooves 10815, 10835 are angled with respect to the pocket axis 10803. The grooves 10815, 10835 each comprise an entry portion and an exit portion where the entry portion of the groove 10815 and the entry portion of the groove 10835 are on opposite sides of the pocket axis 10803 and the exit portion of the groove 10815 and the exit portion of the groove 10835 are on opposite sides of the pocket axis 10803. This configuration encourages legs to form away from each other. For example, instead of head to head contact between a pair of corresponding legs, the legs are configured to form offset with respect to and on opposite sides of the pocket axis 10803.
• The valleys of the forming pockets 10810, 10830 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10810, 10830. FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10830 taken along line 172-172 in FIG. 169. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10830. The outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10810, 10830 define the widest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10810, 10830. FIG. 171 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10830 taken along line 171-171 in FIG. 169 which is within the exit zone forming surface 10832 of the distal forming pocket 10830. FIG. 173 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10830 taken along line 173-173 in FIG. 169 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10832 of the distal forming pocket 10830.
• FIGS. 174-178 depict a forming pocket arrangement 10900 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 may be similar to the forming pocket arrangement 10200 in many respects. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 comprises a proximal forming pocket 10910 and a distal forming pocket 10930 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 10907 of an anvil 10901. The pockets 10910, 10930 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 10903 of the forming pocket arrangement 10900. A staple is intended to be formed along the pocket axis 10903 by the forming pocket arrangement 10900 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 174 and 175, the forming pocket arrangement 10900 further comprises a bridge portion 10905 defined between the forming pockets 10910, 10930. In this instance, the bridge portion 10905 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10907 of the anvil 10901. The bridge portion 10905 comprises a first bridge width “W₁” and a second bridge width “W₂”. The first width “W₁” is greater than the second width “W₂”. The bridge portion also comprises a bridge depth “D”. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bridge portion 10905 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 10907. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 10905. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 10905, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 10903, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10900 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 10908 extending from the planar surface 10907 of the anvil 10901 toward the pockets 10910, 10930 and the bridge portion 10905. The primary sidewalls 10908 are angled at angle θ₂ with respect to the planar surface 10907 of the anvil 10901. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 further comprises edge features 10915, 10935 which provide a transition feature between the outer edges of the pockets 10910, 10930 and the planar surface 10907 and between the longitudinal edges of the pockets 10910, 10930 and the primary sidewalls 10908. These edges 10915, 10935 can be rounded, and/or chamfered, for example. The edge features 10915, 10935 may help prevent staple tips from sticking, as discussed in greater detail below.
• The forming pocket 10910 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10913 and the forming pocket 10930 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 10933. The pocket sidewalls 10913, 10933 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10910, 10930 in the event that the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples initially strike the sidewalls 10913, 10933 of the pockets 10910, 10930. The sidewalls 10913, 10933 extend from the transition edges 10915, 10935 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 10910, 10930. The sidewalls 10913, 10933 of the forming pockets 10910, 10930 are angled with respect to the planar surface 10907 of the anvil 10901 at angle θ₁ in order to direct, or channel, the legs and/or staple tips of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 10910, 10930. The sidewalls 10913, 10933 are configured to encourage the staple tips and/or the legs of the staples to form along the pocket axis 10903 as the staples are formed against the forming surfaces of the pockets 10910, 10930. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 10908 and the pocket sidewalls 10913, 10933 can provide a funnel-like configuration for receiving two staple tips. Referring to FIGS. 176 and 177, the angle θ₁ is greater than the angle θ₂.
• The pockets 10910, 10930 further comprise transition edges 10914, 10934 which provide a transition feature between the pocket sidewalls 10913, 10933 and the forming surfaces, as discussed in greater detail below. In various instances, the transition edges 10914, 10934 can comprise a similar profile as the transition edges 10915, 10935. In other instances, the transition edges 10914, 10934 can comprise a different profile than the transition edges 10915, 10935. In either event, the edges 10914, 10934 can be rounded, or chamfered, for example. The edges 10914, 10934 comprise a first end where the edges 10914, 10934 meet the outer corners of the pockets 10910, 10930 and a second end where the edges 10914, 10934 approach the bridge portion 10905, or the inner ends of the pockets 10910, 10930. The edges 10914, 10934 may transition into the transition edges 10915, 10935 near the bridge portion 10905. The edge features 10914, 10934 may also help prevent staple tips from sticking in the pockets 10910, 10930 when forming, as discussed in greater detail below.
• Referring again to FIGS. 174 and 175, the forming surfaces of the pockets 10910, 10930 comprise an entry zone forming surface 10911, 10931 and an exit zone forming surface 10912, 10932, respectively. In this instance, the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the entry zone forming surfaces 10911, 10931 cover is greater than the amount of surface area of the forming surfaces that the exit zone forming surfaces 10912, 10932 cover. As a result, the entry zone forming surfaces 10911, 10931 do not transition to the exit zone forming surfaces 10912, 10932 in the center of each pocket 10910, 10930. Rather, the transition points where the entry zones 10911, 10931 transition to the exit zones 10912, 10932 are closer to the bridge portion 10905. The transitions between the entry zone forming surfaces 10911, 10931 and the exit zone forming surfaces 10912, 10932 define a valley, or trough of each pocket 10910, 10930. The valleys of the forming pockets 10910, 10930 define a portion, or segment, of the forming surfaces having the greatest vertical distance from the planar surface 10907.
• Referring to FIG. 175, the forming surfaces of each pocket 10910, 10930 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 10910 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10918 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10911 and an exit radius of curvature 10919 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10912. Similarly, the pocket 10930 comprises an entry radius of curvature 10938 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 10931 and an exit radius of curvature 10939 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 10932. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 10918, 10938 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 10919, 10939. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• The forming surfaces of each pocket 10910, 10930 also comprise grooves, or channels, 10916, 10936 defined in the entire longitudinal length of each form pocket 10910, 10930, respectively. The forming surfaces may comprise a main forming surface length and the grooves may comprise a groove length which is greater than the main forming surface length. The grooves 10916, 10936 are configured to guide staple tips and/or legs during the forming process. The grooves also comprise transition edges 10917, 10937 providing a transition between the forming surfaces and the grooves 10916, 10936 and between the grooves 10916, 10936 and the sidewalls 10913, 10933. The transition edges 10917, 10937 may comprise a rounded profile and/or a chamfered profile, for example. Referring to FIG. 176, a staple “S” is shown. FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10930 taken along line 176-176 in FIG. 174. This cross-sectional view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 10932. The diameter of the staple “S” is larger than the width of the groove 10936. However, the diameter of the staple “S” is smaller than the width of the groove 10936 plus the transition edges 10937. This prevents the body of the staple “S” from contacting the deepest portion of the groove 10936. This configuration may help maintain minimal contact between the staple “S” as it forms against the forming surface. Minimal contact between the staple and the pocket may help prevent staple tip sticking and provide a more continuously formed staple, as discussed in greater detail below. The forming pocket arrangement 10900 is configured to be employed with staples of varying diameter. In one instance, the diameter of the staple may be less than that of the width of the grooves 10916, 10936 such that the staple can enter and contact the deepest portion of the grooves 10916, 10936.
• In addition to defining the transition points where the entry zones transition to the exit zones, the valleys of the forming pockets 10910, 10930 also define the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces of each pocket 10910, 10930. The outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 10910, 10930, also referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 10911, 10931, comprise an entry width. The inner longitudinal edges of each pocket 10910, 10930, also referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 10912, 10932, comprise an exit width. In this instance, the entry width is greater than the exit width. Also, the exit width is greater than the valley width, or the narrowest portion of the forming surfaces. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10930 taken along line 177-177 in FIG. 174. This view illustrates the valley, or trough, of the distal forming pocket 10930. This valley, or trough, is also the transition between the entry zone forming surface 10931 and the exit zone forming surface 10932. FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 10930 taken along line 178-178 in FIG. 174 which is within the entry zone forming surface 10932 of the distal forming pocket 10930.
• FIGS. 179-183 depict a forming pocket arrangement 11000 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 11000 comprises a proximal forming pocket 11010 and a distal forming pocket 11030 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 11007 of an anvil 11001. The pockets 11010, 11030 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 11003 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000. A staple is intended to be formed away from the pocket axis 11003 by the forming pocket arrangement 11000 when deployed from a staple cartridge. Referring to FIGS. 179 and 180, the forming pocket arrangement 11000 further comprises a bridge portion 11005 defined between the forming pockets 11010, 11030. In this instance, the bridge portion 11005 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 11007 of the anvil 11001 and angled with respect to the pocket axis 11003. The bridge portion 11005 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge portion 11005 is substantially U-shaped with a substantial planar bottom portion. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the planar portion of the bridge portion 11005 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 11007. The forming pocket arrangement 11000 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 11005. The forming pocket arrangement 11000 is bilaterally asymmetric with respect to the bridge portion 11005, bilaterally asymmetric with respect to pocket axis 11003, and rotationally symmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• The forming pocket arrangement 11000 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 11008 extending from the planar surface 11007 of the anvil 11001 toward the pockets 11010, 11030 and the bridge portion 11005. The primary sidewalls 11008 are angled at angle θ₂ with respect to the planar surface 11007 of the anvil 11001. The primary sidewalls 11008 comprise inner edges that are curved, or contoured, with respect to the pockets 11010, 11030.
• The forming pocket 11010 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 11013 and the forming pocket 11030 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 11033. The pocket sidewalls 11013, 11033 comprise a substantially V-shaped profile near the entry portion and a curved, or contoured, profile. The sidewalls 11013, 11033 are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 11010, 11030 as well as help control the forming process of the staples. The sidewalls 11013, 11033 extend from the primary sidewalls 11008 and the planar surface 11007 toward the forming surfaces of each pocket 11010, 11030. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 11008 and the pocket sidewalls 11013, 11033 cooperate to funnel corresponding staple tips toward the forming surfaces each pocket 11010, 11030. Discussed in greater detail below, the sidewalls 11013, 11033 comprise entry portions and exit portions where the entry portions comprise a less aggressive channeling configuration than the exit portions.
• Referring again to FIG. 179, the forming surfaces of the pockets 11010, 11030 comprise an entry zone forming surface 11011, 11031 and an exit zone forming surface 11012, 11032, respectively. The entry zone forming surfaces 11011, 11031 can coincide with the less aggressive channeling portions of the sidewalls 11013, 11033. The entry zone forming surfaces 11011, 11031 can also coincide with the substantially V-shaped profile of each pocket 11010, 11030. Similarly, the exit zone forming surfaces 11012, 11032 can coincide with the more aggressive channeling portions of the sidewalls 11013, 11033. The exit zone forming surfaces 11012, 11032 can also coincide with the curved, or contoured, profile of each pocket 11010, 11030. The pockets 11010, 11030 further comprise a forming, or guiding, groove 11015, 11035, respectively, which extend the entire longitudinal length of the pockets 11010, 11030 and are positioned on only one side of the pocket axis 11003. The grooves 11015, 11035 are angled with respect to the pocket axis 11003. The grooves 11015, 11035 are narrower at the outer longitudinal edges of the pockets 11010, 11030 than the inner longitudinal edges of the pockets 11010, 11030. The grooves 11015, 11035 are also parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to each other.
• Referring to FIG. 180, the forming surfaces of each pocket 11010, 11030 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the pocket 11010 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11017 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11011 and an exit radius of curvature 11018 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11012. Similarly, the pocket 11030 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11037 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11031 and an exit radius of curvature 11038 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11032. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 11017, 11037 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 11018, 11038. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• Referring now to FIGS. 181-183, the outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 11010, 11030 are referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 11011, 11031. The entry edges comprise an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 11010, 11030. The inner longitudinal edges of each pocket 11010, 11030 are referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 11012, 11032. The exit edges comprise an exit width which is the narrowest section of the forming surfaces of each pocket 11010, 11030. The transitions between entry and exit zones comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width.
• FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11030 taken along line 181-181 in FIG. 179. This view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 11032 of the forming pocket 11030. The sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled toward is curved more and more aggressively sloped than the other sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled away from. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11030 taken along line 182-182 in FIG. 179. This view is taken near the valley, or trough, of the forming pocket 11030. The curvature, or contoured, profile of each sidewall 11033 is substantially similar near this section of the pocket 11030 though, the sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled toward is, still, curved more and more aggressively sloped than the other sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled away from. FIG. 183 is cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11030 taken along line 183-183 in FIG. 179. This view is taken within the entry zone forming surface 11031 of the forming pocket 11030. In this section of the pocket, the sidewalls 11033 are substantially flat. However, it can be seen that the sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled toward is still curved slightly. The sidewall 11033 which the groove 11035 is angled away from is planar in this section and is angled at angle θ₁ with respect to the planar surface 11007. Angle θ₁ is greater than angle θ₂.
• FIGS. 184-188 depict a forming pocket arrangement 11100 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 11100 comprises a proximal forming pocket 11110 and a distal forming pocket 11130 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 11107 of an anvil 11101. The pockets 11110, 11130 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 11103 of the forming pocket arrangement 11100. Referring to FIGS. 184 and 185, the forming pocket arrangement 11100 further comprises a bridge portion 11105 defined between the forming pockets 11110, 11130. In this instance, the bridge portion 11105 is part of the planar surface 11107 of the anvil 11101. The bridge portion 11105 comprises a bridge width “W”. The forming pocket arrangement 11100 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 11105. The forming pocket arrangement 11100 is bilaterally symmetric with respect to the bridge portion 11105, bilaterally asymmetric with respect to pocket axis 11103, and rotationally asymmetric with respect to the center “C”.
• Each forming pocket 11110, 11130 comprises a filleted edge 11114, 11134, respectively, extending around the perimeter of each pocket 11110, 11130. The edges 11114, 11134 provide a curved transition between the planar surface 11107 and the pockets 11110, 11130. Specifically, the edges 11114, 11134 transition the planar surface 11107 into pocket sidewalls 11113A, 11113B of the pocket 11110 and pocket sidewalls 11133A, 11133B of the pocket 11130. The edges 11114, 11134 also transition the planar surface 11107 into the entry and exit portions of the forming surfaces of each pocket 11110, 11130.
• The sidewalls 11113A, 11133A are angled with respect to the pocket axis 11103 at angle θ. The sidewalls 11113B, 11133B comprise distinct sidewall portions 11121, 11122, 11123 and 11141, 11142, 11143, respectively. The sidewall portions 11121, 11141 are angled with respect to the pocket axis 11103 at a different angle than the angle at which the sidewall portions 11113A, 11133A are angled with respect to the pocket axis 11103. The sidewall portions 11122, 11142 are parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the pocket axis 11103. The sidewall portions 11123, 11143 are parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the sidewalls 11113A, 11133A. The sidewalls 11113A, 11113B, 11133A, 11133B are configured to direct the staple tips and the legs of the staples toward the forming surfaces of the pockets 11110, 11130 as well as help control the forming process of the staples.
• The sidewalls 11113A, 11113B, 11133A, 11133B extend from the transition edges 11114, 11134 to transition edges 11116, 11136. These edges 11116, 11136 provide a rounded, or smoothed, transition feature between the sidewalls 11113A, 11113B, 11133A, 11133B and the forming surfaces of each pocket 11110, 11130. The edges 11116, 11136 may comprise rounded and/or flat profiles.
• Referring again to FIG. 184, the forming surfaces of the pockets 11110, 11130 comprise an entry zone forming surface 11111, 11131 and an exit zone forming surface 11112, 11132, respectively. The pockets 11110, 11130 further comprise a forming, or guiding, groove 11115, 11135 defined in the forming pockets 11110, 11130, respectively. Specifically, the grooves 11115, 11135 extend parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the pocket axis 11103 and reside only in the entry zone forming surface 11111, 11131. The pockets 11110, 11130 also comprise filleted transition edges extending around the perimeter of the grooves 11115, 11135, respectively, to provide a smooth a transition between the forming surfaces and the grooves 11115, 11135. The filleted transition edges may aid in ensuring two-point forming contact, as discussed in greater detail below. The grooves 11115, 11135 also reside entirely on one side of the pocket axis 11103.
• Referring to FIG. 185, the forming surfaces of each pocket 11110, 11130 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the proximal pocket 11110 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11127 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11111 and an exit radius of curvature 11128 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11112. Similarly, the distal pocket 11130 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11147 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11131 and an exit radius of curvature 11148 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11132. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 11117, 11137 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 11118, 11138. Additionally, the forming surfaces comprise a transition point where the radii of curvature switch from entry radii of curvature 11127, 11147 to exit radii of curvature 11128, 11148. In this instance, this transition point occurs at the ends of the grooves 11115, 11135 which are closer to the bridge portion 11105. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• The outer longitudinal edges of each pocket 11110, 11130 are referred to as entry edges because they define the beginning of the entry zone forming surfaces 11111, 11131. The entry edges comprise an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surfaces of each pocket 11110, 11130. The inner longitudinal edges of each pocket 11110, 11130 are referred to as exit edges because they define the end of the exit zone forming surfaces 11112, 11132. The exit edges comprise an exit width which is the narrowest section of the forming surfaces of each pocket 11110, 11130. The transition point where the entry zone transitions to the exit zone comprises a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width.
• FIG. 186 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11130 taken along line 186-186 in FIG. 184. This view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 11132 of the forming pocket 11130. FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11130 taken along line 187-187 in FIG. 184. This view is taken near the valley, or trough, of the forming pocket 11130. In this view, it can be seen that the groove 11135 may be considered an extension of the sidewall portion 11142. FIG. 188 is cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11130 taken along line 188-188 in FIG. 184.
• FIGS. 189-196 depict a forming pocket arrangement 11200 that is configured to deform a staple during a surgical stapling procedure. The forming pocket arrangement 11200 comprises a proximal forming pocket 11210 and a distal forming pocket 11230 defined in a planar, or tissue-contacting, surface 11207 of an anvil 11201. The pockets 11210, 11230 are aligned along a longitudinal pocket axis 11203 of the forming pocket arrangement 11200. Referring to FIGS. 189 and 190, the forming pocket arrangement 11200 further comprises a bridge portion 11205 defined between the forming pockets 11210, 11230. In this instance, the bridge portion 11205 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 11207 of the anvil 11201. The bridge portion 11205 comprises a bridge width “W” and a bridge depth “D”. The bridge depth “D” is the distance that the bridge portion 11205 is recessed with respect to the planar surface 11207. The forming pocket arrangement 11200 comprises a center “C” defined within the bridge portion 11205. In this instance, the center “C” is not the geometrical center of the pocket arrangement 11200, rather, the center “C” is identified as being near the central portion of the bridge portion 11205 to define an intermediate reference point between the pockets to describe, in this case, the lack of symmetry of the pocket arrangement 11200. Specifically, the forming pocket arrangement 11200 is bilaterally asymmetric with respect to the bridge portion 11205, bilaterally symmetric with respect to pocket axis 11203, and rotationally asymmetric with respect to the center “C”. The pockets 11210, 11230 are different in many respects, as discussed in greater detail below.
• The forming pocket arrangement 11200 further comprises a pair of primary sidewalls 11208 extending from the planar surface 11207 of the anvil 11201 toward the pockets 11210, 11230 and the bridge portion 11205. The primary sidewalls 11208 are angled at angle θ with respect to the planar surface 11207 of the anvil 11201.
• The proximal forming pocket 11210 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 11213 configured to direct staple tips and/or legs toward a forming surface of the pocket as well as control the forming of the staples. The pocket sidewalls 11213 are substantially vertical. In other words, the sidewalls 11213 are oriented 90 degrees, or approximately 90 degrees, with respect to the planar surface 11207 of the anvil 11201. The pocket sidewalls 11213 extend from the primary sidewalls 11208 toward the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 11208 and the pocket sidewalls 11213 cooperate to funnel corresponding staple tips toward the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210. Extending from the sidewalls 11213 to the forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 11210 are transition features 11214. In this instance, the features 11214 are curved, however, the features 11214 may be flat in addition to, or in lieu of, being curved. These features 11214 may help prevent staple tip sticking, as discussed in greater detail below.
• The forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 11210 comprises an entry zone forming surface 11211 and an exit zone forming surface 11212. The entry zone forming surface 11211 corresponds with a proximal portion of the proximal pocket 11210. The exit zone forming 11212 corresponds with a distal portion of the proximal pocket 11210. Similarly, the entry zone forming surface 11211 corresponds to a portion of the pocket 11210 of which the corresponding staple tip is intended to enter, or strike, the pocket 11210 and begin forming. The exit zone forming surface 11212 corresponds to a portion of the pocket 11210 where the corresponding staple tip is intended to exit the pocket 11210.
• The forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 11210 also comprises a forming surface length L₁ and a forming surface depth V₁. The length L₁ is identified as the distance between the entry edge of the pocket 11210 and the exit edge of the pocket 11210. The forming surface depth V₁ is identified as the deepest portion of the pocket 11210, or the trough of the pocket 11210, also referred to as the valley of the pocket 11210.
• In many respects, the distal forming pocket 11230 is different than the proximal forming pocket 11210. The distal forming pocket 11230 comprises a pair of pocket sidewalls 11233 configured to direct staple tips and/or legs toward a forming surface of the pocket as well as control the forming of the staples. The sidewalls 11233 comprise discrete sidewall portions angled at different angles with respect to the pocket axis 11203. The pocket sidewalls 11233 are substantially vertical. In other words, the sidewalls 11233 are oriented 90 degrees, or at least substantially 90 degrees, with respect to the planar surface 11207 of the anvil 11201. The pocket sidewalls 11233 extend from the primary sidewalls 11208 toward the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230. Collectively, the primary sidewalls 11208 and the pocket sidewalls 11233 cooperate to funnel corresponding staple tips toward the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230. Extending from the sidewalls 11233 to the forming surface of the proximal forming pocket 11230 are transition features 11234. In this instance the features 11234 are curved, however, the features 11234 may be flat in addition to, or in lieu of, being curved. These features 11234 may help prevent staple tip sticking, as discussed in greater detail below. The features 11234 of the distal forming pocket 11230 comprise a smaller radius of curvature than the features 11213 of the proximal forming pocket 11210.
• The forming surface of the distal forming pocket 11230 comprises an entry zone forming surface 11231 and an exit zone forming surface 11232. The entry zone forming surface 11231 corresponds with a distal portion of the distal pocket 11230. The exit zone forming 11232 corresponds with a proximal portion of the distal pocket 11230. Similarly, the entry zone forming surface 11231 corresponds to a portion of the pocket 11230 of which the corresponding staple tip is intended to enter, or strike, the pocket 11230 and begin forming. The exit zone forming surface 11232 corresponds to a portion of the pocket 11230 where the corresponding staple tip is intended to exit the pocket 11230.
• The forming surface of the distal forming pocket 11210 also comprises a forming surface length L₂ and a forming surface depth V₂. The length L₂ is identified as the distance between the entry edge of the pocket 11230 and the exit edge of the pocket 11230. The forming surface depth V₂ is identified as the deepest portion of the pocket 11230, or the trough of the pocket 11230, also referred to as the valley of the pocket 11230. The forming surface length L₂ of the distal pocket 11230 is greater than the forming surface length L₁ of the proximal pocket 11210. Additionally, the forming surface depth V₁ of the proximal pocket 11210 is greater than the forming surface depth V₂ of the distal pocket 11230. In other instances, the forming surface depth V₁ of the proximal pocket 11210 may be less than the forming surface depth V₂ of the distal pocket 11230.
• The difference in forming surface lengths between two pockets in a pocket arrangement intended to form one staple can be advantageous. In certain instances, tissue can be pushed forward during a firing stroke owing to the advancement of the tissue-cutting knife, for example, and, consequently, tissue may be urged forward during firing of the staples. If the staples are being ejected from the cartridge and into the tissue as the tissue is moving longitudinally relative to the deck, this may cause the staple legs and/or staple tips to bend distally with respect to their bases owing to the tissue flow. In this instance, a distal forming pocket having a greater forming surface length than the proximal forming pocket may be able to account for this longitudinal deflection of the staple legs.
• Referring to FIG. 190, the forming surfaces of each pocket 11210, 11230 comprise more than one radius of curvature. Specifically, the proximal pocket 11210 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11216 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11211 and an exit radius of curvature 11217 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11212. Similarly, the distal pocket 11230 comprises an entry radius of curvature 11236 corresponding to the entry zone forming surface 11231 and an exit radius of curvature 11237 corresponding to the exit zone forming surface 11232. In this instance, the entry radii of curvature 11216, 11236 are larger than the exit radii of curvature 11217, 11237. Additionally, the entry radii of curvature 11216, 11236 are different and the exit radii of curvature 11217, 11237 are different. Specific relationships between the radii of curvature and various pocket features will be discussed in greater detail below along with some potential advantages and patterns of the specific relationships.
• Turning to FIGS. 194-196, the outer longitudinal edge of the proximal pocket 11210 is referred to as an entry edge because it defines the beginning of the entry zone forming surface 11211. The entry edge comprises an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210. The entry width of the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210 is also greater than the bridge width “W”. The inner longitudinal edge of the proximal pocket 11210 is referred to as an exit edge because it defines the end of the exit zone forming surface 11212. The exit edge comprises an exit width which is the narrowest section of the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210. The transition between the entry zone forming surface 11211 and the exit zone forming surface 11212 comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width. The exit width and the transition width of the forming surface of the proximal pocket 11210 are both less than the bridge width “W”.
• FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the proximal forming pocket 11210 taken along line 194-194 in FIG. 189. This view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 11212 of the forming pocket 11210. FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the proximal forming pocket 11210 taken along line 195-195 in FIG. 189. This view is taken at, or near, the valley, or trough, of the forming pocket 11210. FIG. 196 is cross-sectional view of the proximal forming pocket 11210 taken along line 196-196 in FIG. 189. This view is taken within the entry zone forming surface 11211 of the forming pocket 11210.
• Turning to FIGS. 191-193, the outer longitudinal edge of the distal pocket 11230 is referred to as an entry edge because it defines the beginning of the entry zone forming surface 11231. The entry edge comprises an entry width which is the largest width of the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230. The entry width of the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230 is greater than the bridge width “W”. The inner longitudinal edge of the distal pocket 11230 is referred to as an exit edge because it defines the end of the exit zone forming surface 11232. The exit edge comprises an exit width which is the narrowest section of the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230. The transition between the entry zone forming surface 11231 and the exit zone forming surface 11232 comprise a transition width which is less than the entry width but greater than the exit width. The exit width and the transition width of the forming surface of the distal pocket 11230 are both less than the bridge width “W”. Though, with respect to pocket width (distance between outer lateral edges) at these locations, the pocket 11230 is wider than the bridge portion 11205.
• FIG. 191 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11230 taken along line 191-191 in FIG. 189. This view is taken within the exit zone forming surface 11232 of the forming pocket 11230. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11230 taken along line 192-192 in FIG. 189. This view is taken at, or near, the valley, or trough, of the forming pocket 11230. FIG. 193 is cross-sectional view of the distal forming pocket 11230 taken along line 193-193 in FIG. 189. This view is taken within the entry zone forming surface 11231 of the forming pocket 11230.
• Another asymmetric property of the forming pocket arrangement 11200 involves the size of the landing zones of each pocket and the exit zones of each pocket. For example, the proximal pocket comprises a smaller landing zone and exit zone than the landing zone and exit zone of the distal pocket. Additionally, the center “C” of the arrangement does not correspond to the geometric center of the staple crown. Tuning certain features of forming pocket arrangements to better accommodate for expected tissue flow which ultimately can effect the proximal and distal staple legs differently, for example, can lead to asymmetric, but potentially optimal, forming pocket arrangements.
• The difference in forming surface depths between two pockets in a pocket arrangement intended to form a single staple can be advantageous. Turning now to FIGS. 197-200, two different stapling assembly arrangements 11300 and 11300′ are illustrated. One of the arrangements 11300 (FIG. 197) comprises forming pockets with identical forming surface, or valley, depths. The other arrangement 11300′ (FIG. 199) comprises forming pockets with different forming surface depths. Both arrangements 11300, 11300′ are depicted in a scenario where the anvil has not been clamped to be substantially parallel to the top surface, or deck, of the staple cartridge.
• The stapling assembly 11300 depicted in FIG. 197 comprises a first jaw 11310 comprising a staple cartridge 11311, a second jaw 11320 comprising an anvil 11321, and staples 11301 removably stored within the cartridge 11311 configured to be ejected from the cartridge 11311 by a sled 11312. The sled 11312 comprises a cam, or pusher surface, 11313 configured to contact a driving surface 11303 of the staple 11301 and push the staples 11301 toward forming pockets 11323 of the anvil 11321 to form the staple legs 11304 (proximal leg) and 11305 (distal leg) which extend from a staple base portion 11302 of each staple 11301. As discussed above, the forming pockets 11323 of this arrangement 11300 comprise identical forming surface depths. This depth is the distance between a planar anvil surface 11322 and the valley, or trough, of the pocket 11323. When forming the staple 11301 with the anvil 11321 of the arrangement 11300 when the anvil is angled at angle θ with respect to the cartridge deck 11314, the distal leg 11305 will form with a larger forming height than the proximal leg 11304 (FIG. 198). This may also be described as the distal leg 11305 not being completely formed due to the fact that the anvil 11321 was not clamped into a position such that the planar anvil surface 11322 was parallel to the cartridge deck 11314.
• The stapling assembly 11300′ depicted in FIG. 199 comprises all of the same elements as the stapling assembly 11300 with the exception of the second jaw 11320. The stapling assembly 11300′ comprises a second jaw 11320′ comprising an anvil 11321′ including a planar anvil surface 11322′ and a plurality of forming pockets 11323A, 11323B defined in the anvil 11321′. As discussed above, the forming pockets 11323A, 11323B of this arrangement 11300′ comprise different forming surface depths. The proximal pockets 11323A, configured to form proximal staple legs such as the proximal staple leg 11304, comprise a deeper forming surface depth than the distal pockets 11323B. The distal pockets 11323B, configured to form distal staple legs such as the distal staple leg 11305, comprise a forming surface depth shallower than that of the proximal pockets 11323A in order to account for a potentially-angled jaw 11320′. When forming the staples 11301 with the anvil 11321′ of the arrangement 11300′ when the anvil is angled at angle θ with respect to the cartridge deck 11314, the proximal leg 11304 and the distal leg 11305 may form with identical, or substantially the same, forming heights (FIG. 201).
• Although the anvil is intended to be clamped into a position placing the anvil surface substantially parallel to the deck of the cartridge, this is does not always happen. For example, due to unexpected tissue behavior and/or the nature of a surgical stapling procedure, thicker tissue sections may end up in the distal portion of the end effector (this can occur with already stapled tissue that ends up re-clamped in a proximal section of the end effector for a subsequent firing that is thinner and more compact than the tissue at the distal end of the next section of tissue to be stapled). Consequently, the anvil may not be able to be clamped into a substantially parallel configuration with respect to the cartridge. As a result, staples may form like staple 11301 in FIG. 1 having one partially-formed leg 11305 and one fully-formed leg 11304. Instead of designing the anvil to ensure parallel alignment with the cartridge when clamped, one solution may be to embrace the likelihood of non-parallel alignment and design the forming pocket arrangement, or forming pocket pairs, as described above. Moreover, in the event that the anvil shown in the arrangement 11300′ depicted in FIG. 199 is clamped at least substantially parallel to the deck 11314, the distal leg of the staple may over form. Over-forming a staple may, in some circumstances, be more advantageous than under, or partially, forming (FIG. 198) a staple. Providing a valley depth difference between pocket pairs can prevent modifications between proximal and distal legs of staples.
• FIGS. 201-204 depict various anvils to be employed with a surgical instrument for forming surgical staples. FIG. 201 depicts an anvil 11400 comprising a cartridge-facing portion 11401. The anvil 11400 comprises a pair of longitudinal, inner rows 11407A, 11407B of forming pockets 11405, a pair of longitudinal, intermediate rows 11408A, 11408B of forming pockets 11405, and a pair of longitudinal, outer rows 11409A, 11409B of forming pockets 11405. The rows 11407A, 11407B, 11408A, 11408B, 11409A, 11409B are aligned with, or substantially parallel to, a longitudinal anvil axis 11403. The forming pockets 11405 are defined in the cartridge-facing portion 11401. The cartridge-facing portion 11401 may be planar or may comprise multiple stepped surfaces, for instance. For example, the cartridge-facing portion 11401 may comprise two different stepped surfaces where the inner rows 11407A, 11407B and intermediate rows 11408A, 11408B of forming pockets 11405 are defined in one of the steps and the outer rows 11409A, 11409B of forming pockets 11405 are defined in the other step. Another example may include three different stepped surfaces: the inner rows 11407A, 11407B of forming pockets 11405 defined in a first step, the intermediate rows 11408A, 11408B of forming pockets 11405 defined in a second step, and the outer rows 11409A, 11409B of forming pockets 11405 defined in a third step.
• FIG. 202 depicts an anvil 11410 comprising a cartridge-facing portion 11411 and laterally changing pairs of forming pockets defined therein. The anvil 11410 comprises a pair of longitudinal, inner rows 11417A, 11417B of forming pocket pairs 11421, a pair of longitudinal, intermediate rows 11418A, 11418B of forming pocket pairs 11423, and a pair of longitudinal, outer rows 11419A, 11419B of forming pocket pairs 11425. The rows 11417A, 11417B, 11418A, 11418B, 11419A, 11419B are aligned with, or substantially parallel to, a longitudinal anvil axis 11413. The forming pocket pairs 11421, 11423, 11425 are defined in the cartridge-facing portion 11401. The pocket pairs 11421 are comprised of a first type of forming pockets 11422. These forming pockets 11422 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10210, 10230, for example. The pocket pairs 11423 are comprised of a second type of forming pockets 11424A (proximal), 11424B (distal) which are asymmetric. The forming pockets 11424A, 11424B may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 11210, 11230, respectively, for example. The pocket pairs 11425 are comprised of a third type of forming pockets 11426. These forming pockets 11422 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10110, 10130, for example. The anvil 11410 may also comprise various stepped configurations as discussed in connection with the anvil 11400, among others.
• FIG. 203 depicts an anvil 11430 comprising a cartridge-facing portion 11431 and longitudinally changing pairs of forming pockets defined therein. The anvil 11430 comprises a pair of longitudinal, inner rows 11437A, 11437B which include forming pocket pairs 11441, 11443, 11445, a pair of longitudinal, intermediate rows 11438A, 11438B which include forming pocket pairs 11441, 11443, 11445, and a pair of longitudinal, outer rows 11439A, 11439B which include forming pocket pairs 11441, 11443, 11445. The rows 11437A, 11437B, 11438A, 11438B, 11439A, 11439B are aligned with, or substantially parallel to, a longitudinal anvil axis 11433. The forming pocket pairs 11441, 11443, 11445 are defined in the cartridge-facing portion 11431. The pocket pairs 11441 are comprised of a first type of forming pockets 11442. These forming pockets 11442 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10210, 10230, for example. The pocket pairs 11443 are comprised of a second type of forming pockets 11444. These forming pockets 11444 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10110, 10130, for example. The pocket pairs 11445 are comprised of a third type of forming pockets 11446A (proximal), 11446B (distal) which are asymmetric. The forming pockets 11446A, 11446B may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 11210, 11230, respectively, for example. The anvil 11430 may also comprise various stepped configurations as discussed in connection with the anvil 11400, among others.
• FIG. 204 depicts an anvil 11450 comprising a cartridge-facing portion 11451 and forming pocket pairs that vary longitudinally and laterally on the anvil 11450. The anvil 11450 comprises a pair of longitudinal, inner rows 11457A, 11457B of forming pocket pairs 11461, a pair of longitudinal, intermediate rows 11458A, 11458B of forming pocket pairs 11463, 11465, and a pair of longitudinal, outer rows 11459A, 11459B of forming pocket pairs 11467. The rows 11457A, 11457B, 11458A, 11458B, 11459A, 11459B are aligned with, or substantially parallel to, a longitudinal anvil axis 11453. The forming pocket pairs 11461, 11463, 11465, 11467 are defined in the cartridge-facing portion 11451. The pocket pairs 11461 are comprised of a first type of forming pockets 11462. These forming pockets 11462 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10510, 10530, for example. The pocket pairs 11463 are comprised of a second type of forming pockets 11464. These forming pockets 11464 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10210, 10230, for example. The pocket pairs 11465 are comprised of a third type of forming pockets 11466A (proximal), 11466B (distal) which are asymmetric. The forming pockets 11466A, 11466B may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 11210, 11230, respectively, for example. The pocket pairs 11467 are comprised of a fourth type of forming pockets 11468. These forming pockets 11468 may be similar in many respects to the forming pockets 10110, 10130, for example. The anvil 11450 may also comprise various stepped configurations as discussed in connection with the anvil 11400, among others.
• In addition to, or in lieu of, laterally and/or longitudinally changing pocket pairs, an anvil may comprise one type of forming pockets on one side of the anvil axis and another type of forming pockets on the other side of the anvil axis. Also, one type of forming pockets may be associated with a proximal portion of the anvil corresponding to an initial stage of firing of the surgical instrument, a second type of forming pockets may be associated with an intermediate portion of the anvil corresponding to a stage of firing that is subsequent the initial stage of firing, and a third type of forming pockets may be associated with a third and final stage of firing that is subsequent the intermediate stage of firing and the initial stage of firing. The pockets may be strategically positioned on the anvil to increase the overall performance of the pockets. For example, one type of forming pockets may form taller staples more consistently and overall better than it forms shorter staples, or vice versa. In another example, with a cartridge having multiple staples with different diameters it may be advantageous to have the forming pockets that form staples with smaller diameters form the smaller staples in the cartridge and, similarly, have the forming pockets that form staples with larger diameters form the larger staples in the cartridge.
• Turning now to FIG. 205, a table 12000 is shown identifying features of various forming pocket arrangements. The table identifies features for forming pocket arrangement 10100 and forming pocket arrangement 10200. The table also identifies features for other forming pocket arrangements tested in a finite element analysis environment that may be similar to the forming pocket arrangements 10100, 10200 in many respects. Forming pocket arrangements A1, A2 are similar to forming pocket arrangement 10100 and forming pocket arrangements B1, B2 are similar to forming pocket arrangement 10200. The table 12000 also identifies features of the forming pocket arrangements 12100.
• Referring also to FIG. 206, features 12001, 12003, 12005, 12007, and 12009 are referenced with respect to some of the forming pocket arrangements identified in the table 12000 as well as another forming pocket arrangement in accordance with at least one embodiment. From top to bottom in FIG. 206, cross-sectional views of the forming pocket arrangement 10100, the forming pocket arrangement 12100, the forming pocket arrangement 10200, and the forming pocket arrangement 10400 are illustrated. The feature 12001 represents the longitudinal enter radius of each forming pocket. The feature 12003 represents the longitudinal exit radius of each forming pocket. The feature 12005 represents the distance between the valleys of the forming pocket pairs. In other words, the feature 12005 represents the distance between the deepest point of the pockets in each forming pocket arrangement. The feature 12007 represents the width of the ridge, or bridge, of each forming pocket arrangement. The feature 12009 represents the depth of the ridge, or bridge, of each forming pocket arrangement.
• FIG. 207 depicts three forming pocket arrangements 10100, 10200, 10400 and corresponding staples 10100′, 10200′, 10400′ formed with the forming pocket arrangements 10100, 10200, 10400, respectively. The pocket arrangement 10200 requires the least amount of force to fully form the staple 10200′. In other words, the maximum force required to form the staple 10200′ with the forming pocket arrangement 10200 is less than the maximum force required to form the other staples 10100′, 10400′ with the forming pocket arrangements 10100, 10400. This can be advantageous in that minimizing overall staple firing force can minimize stress and strain on other components within the surgical stapling assembly. Minimizing mechanical stress and strain can reduce the likelihood of elements failing prematurely. Lessening the necessary firing force can also contribute to decreasing the size of shaft diameters by requiring smaller parts that do not need to be as strong. Buckling of the firing member, for example, is a well-recognized issue when trying to minimize the size of shaft diameters.
• FIG. 208 is a table 12200 identifying additional features of various forming pocket arrangements discussed above. Column 12201 identifies various maximum forces to fire to fully form a staple with different forming pocket arrangements. Column 12203 identifies various maximum forces to fire to overdrive a staple with different forming pocket arrangements.
• FIG. 209 depicts a staple 12301 in a B-formed configuration 12300 and in a overdrive configuration 12300′ formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10100. The staple 12301 comprises a staple base 12302 and a pair of staple legs 12303 extending from the staple base 12302. Each staple leg 12303 comprises a staple tip 12304 configured to contact a forming pocket when the staple 12301 is driven toward the anvil of a surgical instrument. The staple 12301 comprises various bend regions, or zones, 12305, 12306, which, when formed by certain forming pocket arrangements, can bend into predictable bend profiles. The forming pocket arrangement 10100 causes the bend regions 12305, 12306, to bend into a discrete profile. The staple 12301 in the fully-formed configuration, for instance, comprises a boxy structure rather than a continuously formed structure. The bend regions 12305, 12306 comprise sharp bend portions. As a result, there is a significant gap distance 12307 between the bend portions 12306 of the legs 12303. Additionally, the gap distance 12308 between the tips 12304 of the legs 12303 is significant. In various tissue-fastening scenarios, these gaps 12307, 12308 between the bend portions 12606 and the staple tips 12304 can less effectively seal tissue.
• The force F required to form the staple 12301 with the forming pocket arrangement 10100 is illustrated in the graph 12310 of FIG. 209. The force profile comprises specific zones and peaks 12302, 12303, 12304, 12305, 12306. The initial peak 12302 represents tip strike, or tip contact, with its corresponding forming pocket. Once the staple tips strike the pockets and stick in the exit zones of the pockets, the legs 12303 will then buckle and begin bending at the bend regions 12306. The bending of these bend regions 12306 corresponds to the portion 12313 of the graph 12310. The legs 12303 will then progress to a second buckling stage once the bend regions 12306 are fully, or mostly, formed and the bend regions 12306 contact the entry zone forming surfaces of the pockets. Once the bend regions 12306 contact the forming pockets, the legs 12303 will buckle into a B-shape forming the bend regions 12305. This second buckling stage produces a second force peak 12314.
• When the staple 12301 is formed beyond its B-formed configuration 12300, the staple is in an overdrive configuration 12300′. This can happen for various reasons. One reason may be that, the staple 12301 is lifted above the deck of the staple cartridge to fully eject the staple 12301 from the staple cartridge. With respect to the overdrive configuration 12300′ of the staple 12301, the gap 12308 has significantly increased in distance between the staple tips 12304. Additionally, the legs 12303 of the staple 12301 have began to form additional overdrive bend regions between the staple base 12302 and the bend regions 12305. When this region bends, the formed staple height can decrease which can also contribute to less effectively sealed tissue. Moreover, when this region bends, bowing “B” of the staple legs 12303 can occur. This bowing “B” comprises a width that, when increased, can cause the staple 12301 to less effectively seal tissue. Referring to the graph 12310, a second force peak 12316 represents the force required to overdrive the staple 12301. This force is significantly more than the force required to B-form the staple 12301 at peak 12314.
• FIG. 210 depicts a staple 12321 in a B-formed configuration 12320 and in a overdrive configuration 12320′ formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10200. The staple 12321 comprises a staple base 12322 and a pair of staple legs 12323 extending from the staple base 12322. Each staple leg 12323 comprises a staple tip 12324 configured to contact corresponding forming pockets when the staple 12321 is driven toward the anvil of a surgical instrument. The staple 12321 comprises various bend regions, or zones, 12325, 12326, which, when formed by certain forming pocket arrangements, can bend into predictable bend profiles. The forming pocket arrangement 10200 causes the bend regions 12325, 12326 to bend into a more continuous profile than the bend regions 12305, 12306 of the staple 12301 formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10100. In other words, the staple 12321 in the B-formed configuration comprises a profile closer to an actual “B” staple configuration than the fully-formed, discrete bend configuration of the staple 12301. The bend regions 12325, 12326 comprise larger bend radii of curvature than the bend regions 12305, 12306. As a result, the gap distance 12327 between the bend portions 12326 of the legs 12323 is less than the gap distance 12307. Moreover, the gap distance 12328 between the tips 12324 of the legs 12323 is less than the gap distance 12308. In various tissue-fastening scenarios, the smaller gaps 12327, 12328 between the bend portions 12626 and the staple tips 12324 can aid in sealing tissue more effectively than the staple 12301. Minimizing these gap distances may increase the tissue capturing ability of the staple 12321.
• The force F required to form the staple 12321 with the forming pocket arrangement 10200 is illustrated in the graph 12330 of FIG. 210. The force profile comprises specific zones 12333, 12335 and peaks 12332, 12334, 12336. The initial peak 12332 represents tip strike, or tip contact, with its corresponding forming pocket. Once the staple tips strike the pockets and stick in the exit zones of the pockets, the legs 12323 will then buckle and begin bending at the bend regions 12326. The bending of these bend regions 12326 corresponds to the portion 12333 of the graph 12330. The legs 12323 will then progress to a second buckling stage once the bend regions 12326 are fully, or mostly, formed and the bend regions 12326 contact and glide within the entry zone forming surfaces of the pockets. Once the bend regions 12326 contact the forming pockets, the legs 12323 will buckle into a B-shape forming the bend regions 12325. This second buckling stage produces a second force peak 12334. Compared to the staple 12301, the staple 12321 formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10200 requires less force to fully form.
• In a situation where the staple 12321 is formed beyond its B-formed configuration 12320 can be referred to as an overdrive configuration 12320′. With respect to the overdrive configuration 12320′ of the staple 12321, the gap distance 12328 has increased in distance between the staple tips 12304, however, the gap is not as significant as the gap distance between the tips 12304 of the staple 12301 in its overdrive configuration 12300′. The gap distance 12327 between the bend regions 12326 has decreased. Additionally, the legs 12323 of the staple 12321 have began to form additional overdrive bend regions between the staple base 12322 and the bend regions 12325. However, compared to the staple 12301, the bowing “B” of the staple legs 12323 is less than the bowing “B” of the staple legs 12303 in its overdrive configuration 12300′. Referring to the graph 12330 in FIG. 210, another force peak 12336 represents the force required to overdrive the staple 12321. The force 12336 is similar to the force 12334 required to B-form the staple 12301. As a result, the force to fire the staple 12321 in an overdrive situation is not as critical to the rest of the instrument as the force to fire the staple 12301 in an overdrive situation.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10100 and staple 12301 are illustrated in FIGS. 211 and 212 in a tip strike stage 12400, a first bend stage 12400′, a second bend stage 12400″, and a B, or fully, formed stage 12400′″. During the tip strike stage 12400, the legs of the staple 12301 are configured to buckle into the first bend stage 12400′. After buckling, the legs bend creating first bend regions. The legs are configured to buckle a second time when the first bend regions contact the forming pockets into the second bend stage 12400″. After buckling a second time, the legs bend again creating second bend regions. The staple 12301 then finishes forming and, desirably, attains a fully formed stage 12400′″. As can be seen in FIG. 212, the fully formed stage 12400′″ illustrates the staple 12301 with discretely bent legs.
• The forming pocket arrangement 10200 and staple 12321 are illustrated in FIGS. 213 and 214 in a tip strike stage 12500, a first bend stage 12500′, a second bend stage 12500″, and a fully formed stage 12500′″. During the tip strike stage 12500, the legs of the staple 12501 are configured to buckle into the first bend stage 12500′. After buckling, the legs bend creating first bend regions. The first bend regions of the staple 12321 comprise greater radii of curvature than the first bend regions of the staple 12301. The legs are configured to buckle a second time when the first bend regions contact the forming pockets into the second bend stage 12500″. After buckling a second time, the legs bend again creating second bend regions. The second bend regions of the staple 12321 comprise a greater radius of curvature than the second bend regions of the staple 12301. Because the bend regions of the staple 12321 comprise a greater radius of curvature than the bend regions of the staple 12301, the legs of the staple 12321 comprise more continuously formed staple legs. The staple 12321 then finishes forming and, desirably, attains a fully formed stage 12500′″. As can be seen in FIG. 214, the fully-formed stage 12500′″ illustrates the staple 12321 with more continuously-formed staple legs than the staple 12301. As a result, the staple 12321 more closely resembles a true “B” formation than the staple 12301.
• Compared to the staple 12301 and its respective forming pocket arrangement 10100, the staple 12321 forms with less of a tissue path, or footprint, than the staple 12301. A large tissue path footprint can cause excessive tissue stretching and/or ripping during the forming of the staple. Because of the more continuous curvature of the profile of the formed staple 12321, the legs 12323 form and follow closer to the path of the tips 12324 than the legs 12303 and the tips 12304.
• FIGS. 215 and 216 depict the staples 12301, 12321 forming from their tip strike stage to a partially-formed stage. This partially-formed stage may also be referred to as a tip sticking stage. As can be seen in FIG. 215, the legs 12303 are configured to buckle creating the bend regions 12306. The loads experienced by the legs 12303 when formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10100 comprise a first eccentricity. As can be seen in FIG. 216, the legs 12323 are configured to buckle creating the bend regions 12326. The loads experienced by the legs 12323 when formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10200 comprise a second eccentricity. Due to the differences in pocket shape of the forming pocket arrangements 10100, 10200, the second eccentricity is greater than the first eccentricity. This relationship causes differing locations of deflection. For example, the legs 12303 deflect at the bend regions 12306 a distance D1 from a datum D. The legs 12323 deflect at the bend regions 12326 a distance D2 from a datum D. The distance D2 is less than the distance D1. Lowering the deflection, or the bend regions 12326 causes the legs 12323 to buckle and form with greater radii of curvature thus creating more continuously formed staple legs.
• Referring now to FIGS. 217-224, forming of staples formed with various forming pocket arrangements discussed above will now be described. Staples do not always contact their respective forming pockets in an aligned state. Providing forming pocket arrangements which can counter poor formation of a staple in the event that the staple is not aligned with its corresponding forming pockets during forming can be advantageous.
• FIG. 217 depicts a side view 12700 and a bottom view 12700′ of a staple 12701 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10200. However, this staple 12701 was not aligned with the pocket axis 10203 of the forming pocket arrangement 10200 during the forming process. The staple 12701 was driven off plane with respect to the pocket axis 10203. The tips 12704 did not strike the forming pocket arrangement 10200 along the pocket axis 10203 nor was the crown, or base, 12702 of the staple 12701 aligned with the pocket axis 10203 during forming.
• The staple 12701 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. The tips 12704 are configured to cross the first tip alignment axis TA1 and, as a result, overlap, or cross each other. The fully formed location of the tips 12704 defines the second tip alignment axis TA2. This axis can be defined as an axis parallel to the crown alignment axis CA defined by the crown 12702 and aligned with an average point between the tips 12704. Minimizing the distance between the crown alignment axis CA and the second tip alignment axis TA2 can be advantageous in that the closer that these axes are to each other, the more effective the tissue capturing and/or sealing ability of the staple 12701.
• FIG. 218 is a comparison of the staple 12701 and forming pocket arrangement 10200 of FIG. 217 and a staple 12801 formed with forming pocket arrangement 10100. As can be seen from FIG. 217, the distance between the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA of the staple 12801 is greater than the distance between the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA of the staple 12701. Moreover, the tips 12804 of the staple 12801 do not overlap in this misalignment forming scenario of the staple 12801. The staple 12801 formed on a path 12805 directed away from the crown alignment axis CA whereas the staple 12701 formed on a path 12705 more aligned with the crown alignment axis CA.
• FIG. 219 depicts a side view 12900 and a bottom view 12900′ of a staple 12901 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10400. However, this staple 12901 was not aligned with the pocket axis 10403 of the forming pocket arrangement 10400 during the forming process. The staple 12901 was driven off plane with respect to the pocket axis 10403. The tips 12904 did not strike the forming pocket arrangement 10400 along the pocket axis 10403 nor was the crown, or base, 12902 of the staple 12901 aligned with the pocket axis 10403 during forming.
• The staple 12901 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. The tips 12904 are configured to partially, and/or fully, cross the first tip alignment axis TA1 and, as a result, partially cross each other. The fully formed location of the tips 12904 defines the second tip alignment axis TA2. This axis can be defined as an axis parallel to the crown alignment axis CA defined by the crown 12902 and aligned with an average point between the tips 12904. Minimizing the distance between the crown alignment axis CA and the second tip alignment axis TA2 can be advantageous in that the closer that these axes are to each other, the more effective the tissue capturing and/or sealing ability of the staple 12901. Compared to the forming pocket arrangement 10200 of FIG. 217, for example, the narrowly-spaced exit walls and/or the aggressively-angled exit walls of the forming pocket arrangement 10400 can encourage legs of staples to form closer to their crowns. In other words, the forming pocket arrangement 10400 can encourage planar forming in at least the event of misalignment.
• FIG. 220 depicts a side view 13000 and a bottom view 13000′ of a staple 13001 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10300. However, this staple 13001 was not aligned with the pocket axis 10303 of the forming pocket arrangement 10300 during the forming process. The staple 13001 was driven off plane with respect to the pocket axis 10303. The tips 13004 did not strike the forming pocket arrangement 10300 along the pocket axis 10303 nor was the crown, or base, 13002 of the staple 13001 aligned with the pocket axis 10303 during forming.
• The staple 13001 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. The legs 13003 are configured to be formed into a position in which they the legs are at least substantially aligned with the first tip alignment axis TA1. In some instances, the tips 13004 and/or legs may contact each other during forming which may prevent the legs 13003 from crossing the first tip alignment axis TA1. The fully-formed location of the tips 13004 defines the second tip alignment axis TA2. This axis can be defined as an axis parallel to the crown alignment axis CA defined by the crown 13002 and aligned with an average point between the tips 13004. Minimizing the distance between the crown alignment axis CA and the second tip alignment axis TA2 can be advantageous in that the closer that these axes are to each other, the more effective the tissue capturing and/or sealing ability of the staple 13001. Compared to the forming pocket arrangement 10200 of FIG. 217, for example, the narrowly-spaced exit walls and/or the aggressively-angled exit walls of the forming pocket arrangement 10300 can encourage legs of staples to form closer to their crowns. In other words, the forming pocket arrangement 10300 can encourage planar forming in the event of misalignment.
• FIGS. 221 and 222 depict staples formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10500 where one staple was aligned with the pocket axis 10503 of the forming pocket arrangement 10500 and the other staple was misaligned with the pocket axis 10503 of the forming pocket arrangement 10500. FIG. 221 depicts a side view 13100 and a bottom view 13100′ of a staple 13101 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10500. This staple 13101 was aligned with the pocket axis 10503 of the forming pocket arrangement 10500 during the forming process. The tips 13104 struck the forming pocket arrangement 10500 along the pocket axis 10503.
• The staple 13101 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. When aligned with the pocket axis 10503, the staple 13101 forms such that the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA are substantially aligned or, in other words, the staple 13101 assumes a substantially planar configuration. The force to fire the staple 13101 is illustrated in the graph 13110.
• FIG. 222 depicts a side view 13120 and a bottom view 13120′ of a staple 13121 in a fully formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10500. This staple 13121 was misaligned with the pocket axis 10503 of the forming pocket arrangement 10500 during the forming process. The staple 13121 was driven off plane with respect to the pocket axis 10503. The tips 13124 did not strike the forming pocket arrangement 10500 along the pocket axis 10503 nor was the crown, or base, 13122 of the staple 13121 aligned with the pocket axis 10503 during forming.
• The staple 13121 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. When misaligned with the pocket axis 10503, the staple 13121 forms such that the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA are substantially aligned with each other or, in other words, the staple 13121 assumes a substantially planar configuration. Compared to FIG. 221 where the staple 13101 was aligned with the pocket axis 10503, the staple 13121 forms into a fully-formed configuration that may be more acceptable to a surgeon to more adequately seal tissue than staples formed with other forming pocket arrangements which form in a misaligned state.
• FIGS. 223 and 224 depict staples formed with the forming pocket arrangement 11000 where one staple was aligned with the pocket axis 11003 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000 and the other staple was misaligned with the pocket axis 11003 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000. FIG. 223 depicts a side view 13200 and a bottom view 13200′ of a staple 13201 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 11000. This staple 13201 was aligned with the pocket axis 11003 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000 during the forming process. The tips 13204 struck the forming pocket arrangement 11000 along the pocket axis 11003.
• The staple 13201 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. When aligned with the pocket axis 11003, the staple 13101 forms such that the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA are substantially aligned, however, the axes TA2, CA are also non-parallel. One leg 13204 formed on one side of the crown 13203 and the other leg 13204 formed on the other side of the crown 13203. The force to fire the staple 13201 is illustrated in the graph 13210. It can be seen in the graph 13210 that the force to fire the staple 13201 does not comprise two distinct, substantial force peaks as graphs related to other forming pocket arrangements discussed above. The staple 13201 is configured to contact multiple points of the pockets of the forming pocket arrangement 11000 simultaneously during forming. This dual-tangent contact with the forming pockets can help reduce staple tip and/or leg sticking as well as the force to fire the staple 13201.
• FIG. 224 depicts a side view 13220 and a bottom view 13220′ of a staple 13221 in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 11000. This staple 13221 was misaligned with the pocket axis 11003 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000 during the forming process. The staple 13221 was driven off plane with respect to the pocket axis 11003. The tips 13224 did not strike the forming pocket arrangement 11000 along the pocket axis 11003 nor was the crown, or base, 13222 of the staple 13221 aligned with the pocket axis 11003 during forming.
• The staple 13221 comprises a first tip alignment axis TA1, a second tip alignment axis TA2, and a crown alignment axis CA. When misaligned with the pocket axis 11003, the staple 13221 forms such that the second tip alignment axis TA2 and the crown alignment axis CA are substantially aligned with each other or, in other words, the staple 13221 assumes a substantially planar configuration. The axes TA2, CA are parallel. Compared to FIG. 223 where the staple 13201 was aligned with the pocket axis 11003, the staple 13221 forms into a fully-formed configuration that may be more acceptable to a surgeon to more adequately seal tissue than staples formed with other forming pocket arrangements which form in a misaligned state. The force to fire the staple 13221 is illustrated in the graph 13230. Similar to the staple 13201, the force to fire the staple 13201 does not comprise two distinct, substantial force peaks as graphs related to other forming pocket arrangements discussed above.
• Still referring to FIG. 224, a cross section of a forming pocket 11030 of the forming pocket arrangement 11000 is illustrated with various diameter staple profiles 11041, 11042, 11043. Various sizes of staples are configured to be formed with the forming pocket arrangement 11000. Larger staple diameters may provide the dual-tangent contact with the forming pocket sidewalls as discussed above. Smaller diameter staples may provide full contact with the bottom 11035 of the forming pocket 11030 during forming.
• Having grooves formed in forming surfaces of forming pockets can encourage staples to form more planar than staples formed with forming pockets without grooves formed in their forming surfaces especially when the staples are misaligned with the forming pocket axis during forming. Turning now to FIGS. 225 and 226, a staple 13301 is illustrated in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10100 (FIG. 225) and a staple 13401 is illustrated in a fully-formed configuration formed with the forming pocket arrangement 10600 (FIG. 226). The staples 13301, 13401 were misaligned with their respective pocket axes 10103, 10603 during forming. As can be seen from the side views 13300, 13400 of the fully formed staples 13301, 13401, a forming surface groove may not effect the resultant forming configuration in this plane. Turning now to the bottom views 13300′, 13400′ of the staples 13301, 13401, the staple 13401 comprises a more planar fully formed configuration than the staple 13301. The tips 13304 of the staple 13301 may exit the forming pocket arrangement 10100 in a direction pointed away from the pocket axis 10103. The legs 13303 of the staple 13301 may form away from the crown 13302 defining a tip-forming offset distance 13305. The tips 13404 of the staple 13401 are encouraged to exit the forming pocket arrangement 10600 along the pocket axis 10603. The legs 13403 of the staple 13401 may form away from the crown 13402 less than those of the staple 13301 defining a tip-forming offset distance 13405 which, in this instance, is less than the tip-forming offset distance 13305.
• Many of the surgical instrument systems described herein are motivated by an electric motor; however, the surgical instrument systems described herein can be motivated in any suitable manner. In various instances, the surgical instrument systems described herein can be motivated by a manually-operated trigger, for example. In certain instances, the motors disclosed herein may comprise a portion or portions of a robotically controlled system. Moreover, any of the end effectors and/or tool assemblies disclosed herein can be utilized with a robotic surgical instrument system. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, for example, discloses several examples of a robotic surgical instrument system in greater detail.
• The surgical instrument systems described herein have been described in connection with the deployment and deformation of staples; however, the embodiments described herein are not so limited. Various embodiments are envisioned which deploy fasteners other than staples, such as clamps or tacks, for example. Moreover, various embodiments are envisioned which utilize any suitable means for sealing tissue. For instance, an end effector in accordance with various embodiments can comprise electrodes configured to heat and seal the tissue. Also, for instance, an end effector in accordance with certain embodiments can apply vibrational energy to seal the tissue.
• The entire disclosures of:
• • U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 7,000,818, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, which issued on Feb. 21, 2006;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 7,422,139, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH TACTILE POSITION FEEDBACK, which issued on Sep. 9, 2008;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 7,464,849, entitled ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE SYSTEM AND ANVIL ALIGNMENT COMPONENTS, which issued on Dec. 16, 2008;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 7,670,334, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING AN ARTICULATING END EFFECTOR, which issued on Mar. 2, 2010;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 7,753,245, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, which issued on Jul. 13, 2010;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 8,393,514, entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE, which issued on Mar. 12, 2013;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/343,803, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING RECORDING CAPABILITIES; now U.S. Pat. No. 7,845,537;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,873, entitled END EFFECTORS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed Feb. 15, 2008, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,980,443;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/235,782, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,210,411;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/647,100, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ASSEMBLY, filed Dec. 24, 2009; now U.S. Pat. No. 8,220,688;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/893,461, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE, filed Sep. 29, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,733,613;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/036,647, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed Feb. 28, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,561,870;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/524,049, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, filed on Jun. 15, 2012; now U.S. Pat. No. 9,101,358;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,025, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,345,481;
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552;
  • U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0175955, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE TRIGGER LOCKING MECHANISM, filed Jan. 31, 2006; and
  • U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0264194, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR, filed Apr. 22, 2010, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,308,040, are hereby incorporated by reference herein.
• Although various devices have been described herein in connection with certain embodiments, modifications and variations to those embodiments may be implemented. Particular features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. Thus, the particular features, structures, or characteristics illustrated or described in connection with one embodiment may be combined in whole or in part, with the features, structures or characteristics of one ore more other embodiments without limitation. Also, where materials are disclosed for certain components, other materials may be used. Furthermore, according to various embodiments, a single component may be replaced by multiple components, and multiple components may be replaced by a single component, to perform a given function or functions. The foregoing description and following claims are intended to cover all such modification and variations.
• The devices disclosed herein can be designed to be disposed of after a single use, or they can be designed to be used multiple times. In either case, however, a device can be reconditioned for reuse after at least one use. Reconditioning can include any combination of the steps including, but not limited to, the disassembly of the device, followed by cleaning or replacement of particular pieces of the device, and subsequent reassembly of the device. In particular, a reconditioning facility and/or surgical team can disassemble a device and, after cleaning and/or replacing particular parts of the device, the device can be reassembled for subsequent use. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that reconditioning of a device can utilize a variety of techniques for disassembly, cleaning/replacement, and reassembly. Use of such techniques, and the resulting reconditioned device, are all within the scope of the present application.
• The devices disclosed herein may be processed before surgery. First, a new or used instrument may be obtained and, when necessary, cleaned. The instrument may then be sterilized. In one sterilization technique, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic or TYVEK bag. The container and instrument may then be placed in a field of radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays, and/or high-energy electrons. The radiation may kill bacteria on the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument may then be stored in the sterile container. The sealed container may keep the instrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility. A device may also be sterilized using any other technique known in the art, including but not limited to beta radiation, gamma radiation, ethylene oxide, plasma peroxide, and/or steam.
• While this invention has been described as having exemplary designs, the present invention may be further modified within the spirit and scope of the disclosure. This application is therefore intended to cover any variations, uses, or adaptations of the invention using its general principles.
• Any patent, publication, or other disclosure material, in whole or in part, that is said to be incorporated by reference herein is incorporated herein only to the extent that the incorporated materials do not conflict with existing definitions, statements, or other disclosure material set forth in this disclosure. As such, and to the extent necessary, the disclosure as explicitly set forth herein supersedes any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material, or portion thereof, that is said to be incorporated by reference herein, but which conflicts with existing definitions, statements, or other disclosure material set forth herein will only be incorporated to the extent that no conflict arises between that incorporated material and the existing disclosure material.

Claims (21)

What is claimed is:

1. A method of using a surgical instrument system comprising the steps of:

obtaining a surgical instrument, comprising:

an end effector configurable in an open configuration and a closed configuration, wherein the end effector comprises:

an anvil jaw including a cam surface and an array of forming pockets; and

a cartridge jaw configured to receive a staple cartridge;

a closure member configured to engage the cam surface of the anvil jaw; and

a firing member;

inserting a first staple cartridge into the cartridge jaw when a staple cartridge is not in the cartridge jaw, wherein the first staple cartridge comprises a plurality of first staples stored therein, and wherein the first staples are formed from wire;

closing the end effector by moving the closure member through a closure stroke to engage the cam surface of the anvil jaw;

moving the firing member through a firing stroke to eject the first staples from the first staple cartridge;

deforming the first staples against the forming pockets;

inserting a second staple cartridge into the cartridge jaw when the first staple cartridge is not in the cartridge jaw, wherein the second staple cartridge comprises a plurality of second staples stored therein, and wherein the second staples are stamped from at least one sheet of material;

closing the end effector by moving the closure member through a closure stroke to engage the cam surface of the anvil jaw;

moving the firing member through a firing stroke to eject the second staples from the second staple cartridge; and

deforming the second staples against the forming pockets.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the first staples have a first unformed height, wherein the second staples have a second unformed height, and wherein the first unformed height and the second unformed height are the same.

3. The method of claim 2, wherein said step of deforming the first staples and said step of deforming the second staples comprises deforming the first staples and the second staples to the same formed height.

4. The method of claim 2, wherein said step of deforming the first staples and said step of deforming the second staples comprises deforming the first staples and the second staples to different formed heights.

5. The method of claim 1, wherein the first staples have a first unformed height, wherein the second staples have a second unformed height, and wherein the first unformed height and the second unformed height are different.

6. The method of claim 5, wherein said step of deforming the first staples and said step of deforming the second staples comprises deforming the first staples and the second staples to the same formed height.

7. The method of claim 5, wherein said step of deforming the first staples and said step of deforming the second staples comprises deforming the first staples and the second staples to different formed heights.

8. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of moving the firing member comprise controlling the position of the anvil jaw relative to the cartridge jaw.

9. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise moving the anvil jaw relative to the cartridge jaw.

10. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise moving the cartridge jaw relative to the anvil jaw.

11. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise pivoting the cartridge jaw relative to the anvil jaw.

12. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise rotating and translating the cartridge jaw relative to the anvil jaw.

13. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise pivoting the anvil jaw relative to the cartridge jaw.

14. The method of claim 1, wherein said steps of closing the end effector comprise rotating and translating the anvil jaw relative to the cartridge jaw.

15. The method of claim 1, wherein the closure member comprises a tube configured to partially surround the anvil jaw and the cartridge jaw.

16. The method of claim 1, wherein the firing member comprises a first cam configured to engage the anvil jaw and a second cam configured to engage the cartridge jaw.

17. A method of using a surgical instrument system comprising the steps of:

obtaining a surgical instrument, comprising:

an end effector configurable in an open configuration and a closed configuration, wherein the end effector comprises:

an anvil jaw including an array of forming pockets; and

a cartridge jaw configured to receive a staple cartridge;

a closure member comprising a cam surface configured to engage the end effector; and

a firing member;

inserting a first staple cartridge into the cartridge jaw, wherein the first staple cartridge comprises a plurality of first staples stored therein;

moving the closure member through a first closure stroke to cam the end effector into its closed configuration;

moving the firing member through a first firing stroke to eject the first staples from the first staple cartridge;

deforming the first staples with the forming pockets;

removing the first staple cartridge from the cartridge jaw after deforming the first staples;

inserting a second staple cartridge into the cartridge jaw, wherein the second staple cartridge comprises a plurality of second staples stored therein, and wherein the second staples have a different overall configuration than the first staples;

moving the closure member through another closure stroke to cam the end effector into its closed configuration;

moving the firing member through another firing stroke to eject the second staples from the second staple cartridge; and

deforming the second staples with the forming pockets.

18. The method of claim 17, wherein the first staples are comprised of wire, and wherein the second staples are stamped from at least one sheet of metal.

19. The method of claim 17, wherein the first staples have a first unformed height and the second staples have a second unformed height, and wherein the first unformed height and the second unformed height are the same.

20. A method of providing a surgical instrument system comprising the steps of:

providing a surgical instrument, comprising:

an end effector configurable in an open configuration and a closed configuration, wherein the end effector comprises:

an anvil jaw including a cam surface and an array of forming pockets; and

a cartridge jaw configured to receive a staple cartridge;

a closure member configured to engage the cam surface of the anvil jaw and place the end effector into the closed configuration during a closing stroke; and

a firing member configured to perform a firing stroke;

providing a first staple cartridge configured to be removably inserted into the cartridge jaw, wherein the first staple cartridge comprises a plurality of first staples removably stored therein which are deformable by the forming pockets, wherein the first staples comprise a first configuration; and

providing a second staple cartridge configured to be removably inserted into the cartridge jaw, wherein the second staple cartridge comprises a plurality of second staples removably stored therein which are deformable by the forming pockets, and wherein the second staples comprise a second configuration which is different than the first configuration.

21. The method of claim 20, wherein the first configuration comprises a first longitudinal width, wherein the second configuration comprises a second longitudinal width, and wherein the first longitudinal width is different than the second longitudinal width.

Images